Colour Copier Service Manual: Ricoh Nashuatec Rex Rotary Gestetner Savin Infotec Lanier Aficio 1224C Aficio 1224CG DSc224 DSc224 DSc224 DSc524 C2408 C2524 ISC824 LD024c
Colour Copier Service Manual: Ricoh Nashuatec Rex
Rotary Gestetner Savin Infotec Lanier
Aficio 1224C Aficio 1224CG
DSc224 DSc224 DSc224 DSc524
C2408 C2524
ISC824 LD024c
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION........................................................................... 1-1 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS........................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ............................................................................ 1-1 1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS.............................................................. 1-2 1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS............................................................... 1-2
1.2 COPIER (B051/B052)............................................................................... 1-3 1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS....................................... 1-3 1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART....................................................... 1-4 1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................... 1-5 1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE........................................................ 1-6
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456) .................................................................... 1-13 1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................... 1-13 1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 1-13
1.4 LCT (B457) ............................................................................................. 1-17 1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................... 1-17 1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 1-17
1.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B386)................................... 1-21 1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................... 1-21 1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 1-21
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)................................................................. 1-24 1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................... 1-24 1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 1-25
1.7 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (B480) ....................................................................... 1-26 1.7.1 ACCESORY CHECK ..................................................................... 1-26 1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 1-27
1.8 SHIFT TRAY........................................................................................... 1-30 1.8.1 COMPONENT CHECK .................................................................. 1-30 1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 1-30
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)................................................................. 1-33 1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................... 1-33 1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 1-33
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT (B509) .......................................................................... 1-35 1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................. 1-35 1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-36
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT (B482)........................................................................... 1-38 1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................. 1-38 1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-38
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) ........................................................... 1-41 1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................. 1-41 1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-42
1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458) ............................................................. 1-45 1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK................................................................. 1-45 1.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-46
1.14 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION........................................................ 1-48
ii
1.15 MEMORY.............................................................................................. 1-49 1.16 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION.......................................................... 1-51 1.17 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ........................................................ 1-53 1.18 TRAY HEATER..................................................................................... 1-54 1.19 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) .............................. 1-55 1.20 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)........................................................ 1-57
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 2-1 2.1 MAIN UNIT ............................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 OVERVIEW...................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 PM TABLE ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE.................................................................... 2-5
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 3-1 3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 FILTERS................................................................................................... 3-1 3.3 SCANNER UNIT....................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ........................................................................ 3-2 3.3.2 APS SENSORS ............................................................................... 3-2 3.3.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY .............................................................. 3-3 3.3.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER..................................................... 3-5 3.3.5 SCANNER LAMP............................................................................. 3-5 3.3.6 SCANNER I/O BOARD.................................................................... 3-7 3.3.7 SCANNER MOTOR ......................................................................... 3-7 3.3.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE................................................................ 3-7 3.3.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE ................................................................ 3-10
3.4 LASER UNIT........................................................................................... 3-12 3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION....................................................... 3-12 3.4.2 LASER UNIT.................................................................................. 3-13
Adjusting for Image Skew .................................................................. 3-15 D-Phase Adjustment .......................................................................... 3-16 Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment ............................................................ 3-17
3.4.3 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR AND LSD................................... 3-18 3.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ........................................................................... 3-19 3.6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)........................................................ 3-20
3.6.1 PCU ASSEMBLY ........................................................................... 3-20 3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES ........................................................... 3-21 3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT, GRID, WIRE, AND CLEANER............ 3-22 3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR ............................ 3-23 3.6.5 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT......................................................... 3-23 3.6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT................................. 3-23
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT ...................................................................... 3-24 3.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT UNIT ..................................................... 3-24 3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER .................................................................... 3-24
3.8 FUSING/PAPER EXIT ............................................................................ 3-25 3.8.1 FUSING UNIT ................................................................................ 3-25 3.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT......................................................................... 3-25 3.8.3 OIL SUPPLY PAD.......................................................................... 3-26 3.8.4 CLEANING ROLLER AND FUSING SPONGE ROLLER............... 3-26
iii
3.8.5 OILING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER.............................. 3-27 3.8.6 FUSING LAMPS ............................................................................ 3-28 3.8.7 FUSING INNER UNIT.................................................................... 3-29 3.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOFUSE.......................................... 3-29 3.8.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS........................................................... 3-30 3.8.10 FUSING BELT UNIT AND PRESSURE ROLLER UNIT .............. 3-30 3.8.11 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER GEAR, AND CLEANING ROLLER........................................................... 3-31 3.8.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR ......................................... 3-32 3.8.13 OIL ABSORBERS........................................................................ 3-33 3.8.14 PAPER EXIT/OVERFLOW SENSORS........................................ 3-34
3.9 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT ......................................................... 3-36 3.9.1 FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD ........................................... 3-36 3.9.2 REGISTRATION SENSOR............................................................ 3-37 3.9.3 PAPER FEED SENSOR 1 ............................................................. 3-40 3.9.4 PAPER NEAR-END SENSORS..................................................... 3-40 3.9.5 PAPER FEED SENSOR 2 ............................................................. 3-41 3.9.6 PAPER END SENSOR 1 ............................................................... 3-42 3.9.7 PAPER END SENSOR 2 ............................................................... 3-42
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............................................................. 3-43 3.10.1 EXHAUST FAN AND I/O BOARD................................................ 3-43 3.10.2 EX I/O BOARD............................................................................. 3-43 3.10.3 BICU BOARD AND CONTROLLER BOARD............................... 3-44 3.10.4 HDD ............................................................................................. 3-45 3.10.5 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD ............................................. 3-45 3.10.6 POWER SUPPLY UNIT............................................................... 3-46
3.11 DRIVE UNITS ....................................................................................... 3-47 3.11.1 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES...................................................... 3-47
K and Y Development Units ............................................................... 3-47 C and M Development Units .............................................................. 3-47
3.11.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR............................................................ 3-48 3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR.............................................................................. 3-48 3.11.4 PCU GEAR BOX.......................................................................... 3-49 3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR................................................................ 3-49 3.11.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1............................................................ 3-50 3.11.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR................................................................ 3-50 3.11.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 2............................................................ 3-51 3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH........................................................... 3-51 3.11.10 OIL PUMP.................................................................................. 3-52
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENT........................................................................... 3-53 3.12.1 PRINTING.................................................................................... 3-53
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side .......................................... 3-53 Blank Margin ...................................................................................... 3-54 Main Scan Magnification .................................................................... 3-54
3.12.2 SCANNING.................................................................................. 3-55 Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification ....................................................... 3-55 Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration ....................... 3-55 Main Scan Dot Position Correction .................................................... 3-56
3.12.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT...................................................... 3-57
iv
ARDF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration........................... 3-57 ARDF Skew Adjustment..................................................................... 3-58
3.13 COLOR ADJUSTMENT........................................................................ 3-59 3.13.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) ......................................... 3-59 3.13.2 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION.............................................. 3-60
Copy Mode......................................................................................... 3-60 Printer Mode....................................................................................... 3-64
3.14 SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT........................................... 3-66 White Level Check ............................................................................. 3-66 White Level Adjustment ..................................................................... 3-66
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ........................................................ 3-69
4. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................. 4-1 4.1 SERVICE CALL ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS........................................................ 4-1 4.1.2 SC TABLE........................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE.................................................................... 4-18 4.2.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 4-18 4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.................................................. 4-19
4.3 IMAGE TEST MODE .............................................................................. 4-20 4.3.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 4-20 4.3.2 VPU TEST ..................................................................................... 4-20
SP4-907-1: VPU Test Pattern: R........................................................ 4-20 SP4-907-2: VPU Test Pattern: G ....................................................... 4-20 SP4-907-3: VPU Test Pattern: B........................................................ 4-20
4.3.3 IPU TEST....................................................................................... 4-20 SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result................................... 4-20 SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result ................................................ 4-20
4.3.4 GAVD TEST................................................................................... 4-20 4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS................................................ 4-21
4.4.1 SENSORS ..................................................................................... 4-21 4.4.2 SWITCHES.................................................................................... 4-23 4.4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS........................................................ 4-23
4.5 CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS............................................................................................ 4-24
5. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 5-1 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.................................... 5-1 Starting the SP mode ........................................................................... 5-1 Quitting the SP mode ........................................................................... 5-1 SP Mode Touch Screen ....................................................................... 5-2 Copy Window for Test Printing............................................................. 5-3 Working on SP Mode Menus................................................................ 5-3
5.1.2 SP MODE TABLE ............................................................................ 5-4 SP1-XXX: (Feed) ................................................................................. 5-4 SP2-XXX: (Drum)................................................................................. 5-8 SP3-XXX: (Process)........................................................................... 5-21 SP4-XXX: (Scanner) .......................................................................... 5-25
v
SP5-XXX: (Mode)............................................................................... 5-29 SP6-XXX: (Peripherals) ..................................................................... 5-47 SP7-XXX: (Data Log) ......................................................................... 5-50 SP9-XXX: (Etc.) ................................................................................. 5-62
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP5-955-1)...................................... 5-63 5.1.4 INPUT CHECK............................................................................... 5-64
Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803) ............................................... 5-64 Table 1: Tray 1 and 2 Paper Size....................................................... 5-67 Table 2: By-pass Tray Paper Size...................................................... 5-67 Table 3: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Size ................................... 5-67 Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End ........................... 5-67 ARDF Input Check (SP6-007) ............................................................ 5-68 Finisher Input Check (SP6-117) ......................................................... 5-69
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK........................................................................... 5-70 Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804)............................................. 5-70 ARDF Output Check (SP6-008) ......................................................... 5-73 Finisher Output Check (SP6-118) ...................................................... 5-73
5.1.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990) ........................................................ 5-74 5.1.7 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY............................................. 5-74
Total Count......................................................................................... 5-74 Details on the Most Recent Jams....................................................... 5-74
5.1.8 COPY JAM HISTORY DISPLAY.................................................... 5-75 Total Count......................................................................................... 5-75 Details on the Most Recent Jams....................................................... 5-75
5.1.9 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801) ................................................. 5-76 Using a Flash Memory Card............................................................... 5-76 Without Using a Flash Memory Card ................................................. 5-77
5.1.10 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301)............................................. 5-78 5.2 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ....................................................................... 5-79
5.2.1 FIRMWARE ................................................................................... 5-79 5.2.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD.......................................... 5-80
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824) ................................................... 5-80 Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825)............................................... 5-81
5.3 SOFTWARE RESET............................................................................... 5-82 5.4 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ............................. 5-82
5.4.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET........................................................... 5-82 5.4.2 COPIER SETTING RESET............................................................ 5-83
5.5 USER TOOLS......................................................................................... 5-84 5.5.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS................................................... 5-84
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display......................... 5-84 System Settings ................................................................................. 5-84 Copier/Document Server Features..................................................... 5-84 Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings .................................................. 5-84 Inquiry ................................................................................................ 5-84 Counter .............................................................................................. 5-85
5.6 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................... 5-85
vi
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS....................................... 6-1 6.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS....................................................... 6-1 6.1.2 PAPER PATH .................................................................................. 6-2 6.1.3 DRIVE COMPONENTS ................................................................... 6-3
Layout .................................................................................................. 6-3 Drive Power Path ................................................................................. 6-4
6.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................ 6-5 Scanner Unit ........................................................................................ 6-5 Image Transfer..................................................................................... 6-6 Paper Path ........................................................................................... 6-7 Development Units............................................................................... 6-8 Boards.................................................................................................. 6-9
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE............................................................................ 6-10 6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM......................................................................... 6-10 6.2.2 CONTROLLER .............................................................................. 6-12
6.3 COPY PROCESS ................................................................................... 6-14 6.4 PROCESS CONTROL............................................................................ 6-16
6.4.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-16 6.4.2 PROCESS CONTROL STEPS ...................................................... 6-16
Six Steps............................................................................................ 6-16 When is Process Control Done? ........................................................ 6-16 Supplementary Information on Process Control................................. 6-17
6.5 SCANNING............................................................................................. 6-19 6.5.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-19 6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE ......................................................................... 6-20
Book Mode......................................................................................... 6-20 ARDF Mode ....................................................................................... 6-20
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................................... 6-21 6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING ........................................................................... 6-23
6.6.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-23 6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM................................................................. 6-24
Signal Processing .............................................................................. 6-24 A/D Conversion .................................................................................. 6-24 White Level Correction....................................................................... 6-24 Others ................................................................................................ 6-24 Black Level Correction ....................................................................... 6-25 VPU Test Mode.................................................................................. 6-25
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING .................................................................. 6-26 Shading Correction ............................................................................ 6-26 Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction.......................................... 6-26 Scan Line Correction.......................................................................... 6-26 Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .................... 6-27 Filtering .............................................................................................. 6-27 ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ................................................. 6-27 Image Separation............................................................................... 6-28 ACS (Auto Color Selection)................................................................ 6-28 Color Conversion ............................................................................... 6-29
vii
Main Scan Magnification .................................................................... 6-29 Printer Gamma Correction ................................................................. 6-30 Error Diffusion .................................................................................... 6-32 ASICs on the BICU Board Test .......................................................... 6-32
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)........................................................ 6-33 6.7.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-33 6.7.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT.............................................................. 6-34
Power Supply ..................................................................................... 6-34 Grid and Wire Cleaning...................................................................... 6-34 Quenching.......................................................................................... 6-35
6.7.3 OPC BELT DRIVE ......................................................................... 6-35 6.7.4 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT......................................................... 6-36
Bottle Detection.................................................................................. 6-36 Waste Toner Collection...................................................................... 6-36 Drive................................................................................................... 6-37
6.7.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT.................................................... 6-37 Drive................................................................................................... 6-37 Belt Mark Detection............................................................................ 6-38 Transfer Roller ................................................................................... 6-38
6.7.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT................................. 6-39 Image Transfer Belt Cleaning............................................................. 6-39 Waste Toner Collection...................................................................... 6-39 Set Switch and Full Sensor ................................................................ 6-39 Contact Mechanism ........................................................................... 6-40 Power Supply ..................................................................................... 6-41 Drive................................................................................................... 6-41
6.8 LASER EXPOSURE ............................................................................... 6-42 6.8.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-42 6.8.2 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR UNIT .............................................. 6-43
Speed................................................................................................. 6-43 6.8.3 SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR................................................ 6-43 6.8.4 LD UNIT......................................................................................... 6-43 6.8.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .................................................................... 6-44
Front Door.......................................................................................... 6-44 Circuit ................................................................................................. 6-44 Operation Panel Display and Switch Mechanism............................... 6-45
6.9 DEVELOPMENT..................................................................................... 6-46 6.9.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................... 6-46 6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................................................. 6-47
Replacing Units .................................................................................. 6-47 Memory Chip...................................................................................... 6-47
6.9.3 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .................................................... 6-48 Drive................................................................................................... 6-48 Rollers and Agitators.......................................................................... 6-49 Shutter ............................................................................................... 6-49
6.9.4 TONER END DETECTION ............................................................ 6-50 Mechanism......................................................................................... 6-50 Toner Near-End Detection ................................................................. 6-50 Toner End Detection .......................................................................... 6-51
viii
Toner End Recovery .......................................................................... 6-51 6.9.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM ......................... 6-52
Mechanism......................................................................................... 6-52 Reverse Rotation ............................................................................... 6-52
6.9.6 POWER SOURCE ......................................................................... 6-53 Development, Toner Supply, and Doctor Rollers ............................... 6-53 Doctor Roller ...................................................................................... 6-53
6.10 PAPER FEED....................................................................................... 6-54 6.10.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................. 6-54
Transport Speed ................................................................................ 6-55 Friction Pad........................................................................................ 6-55
6.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ................................................................... 6-55 Feed and Vertical Transport............................................................... 6-55 Registration........................................................................................ 6-55
6.10.3 PAPER LIFT ................................................................................ 6-56 Lift Mechanism................................................................................... 6-56 Paper End/Near-End Detection.......................................................... 6-56
6.10.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION .......................................................... 6-57 Mechanism......................................................................................... 6-57 Switch Pattern .................................................................................... 6-57
6.11 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION............................................. 6-58 6.11.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................. 6-58
Jammed Paper Release..................................................................... 6-58 Image Transfer and Paper Separation ............................................... 6-58
6.11.2 CONTACT/SEPARATION MECHANISM..................................... 6-59 Timing ................................................................................................ 6-59 Mechanism......................................................................................... 6-59
6.11.3 POWER SUPPLY ........................................................................ 6-60 Circuit ................................................................................................. 6-60 Paper Transfer Roller Bias................................................................. 6-60 Discharge Plate.................................................................................. 6-60 Temperature/Humidity Control ........................................................... 6-60 Roller Cleaning................................................................................... 6-61
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ..................................................... 6-62 6.12.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................. 6-62 6.12.2 DRIVE.......................................................................................... 6-63 6.12.3 FUSING UNIT COMPONENTS ................................................... 6-64
Fusing Belt ......................................................................................... 6-64 Heating Roller Lamp .......................................................................... 6-64 Pressure Roller Lamp ........................................................................ 6-64 Pressure Roller Pawls........................................................................ 6-64 Fusing Bias ........................................................................................ 6-65 Fusing Unit SCs ................................................................................. 6-65
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY................................................................................ 6-66 Oil Supply........................................................................................... 6-66 Oil Supply........................................................................................... 6-67 Oil End Detection and Recovery ........................................................ 6-68
6.12.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ....................................................... 6-69 6.12.6 ENERGY SAVER MODES........................................................... 6-70
ix
Overview ............................................................................................ 6-70 Panel Off Mode .................................................................................. 6-71 Low Power Mode ............................................................................... 6-72 Auto Off Mode.................................................................................... 6-73
6.12.7 PAPER EXIT................................................................................ 6-74 Drive................................................................................................... 6-74 Paper Jam Detection.......................................................................... 6-74
6.12.8 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION.............................................. 6-74
PERIPHERALS
PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B456-1 1.1 REAR COVER.................................................................................... B456-1 1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES................................................................. B456-1 1.3 LIFT MOTORS.................................................................................... B456-2 1.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR....................................................................... B456-2 1.5 CONTROLLER BOARD...................................................................... B456-2 1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT............................................................................ B456-3 1.7 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS................................ B456-4 1.8 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS...................... B456-4
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................B456-5 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. B456-5 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................. B456-6 2.3 PAPER FEED..................................................................................... B456-7
Paper Feed Mechanism ................................................................. B456-7 Drive Path ...................................................................................... B456-7
2.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION................................................................. B456-8 2.5 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE................... B456-9 2.6 PAPER LIFT ..................................................................................... B456-10 2.7 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION ........................................ B456-11
Paper Height Detection ................................................................ B456-11 Paper End and Bottom Plate........................................................ B456-12
LCT (B457)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B457-1 1.1 TRAY .................................................................................................. B457-1 1.2 SENSORS .......................................................................................... B457-2
Paper Height Sensors of Paper Storage Side................................ B457-2 Left Fence HP Sensor/Paper End Sensor 2................................... B457-2
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE............................................................. B457-3 1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR............................................................................ B457-3 1.5 TRAY MOTOR.................................................................................... B457-4 1.6 MAIN BOARD..................................................................................... B457-4
x
1.7 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH ......................................................... B457-5 1.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH...................................................................... B457-5 1.9 PAPER FEED UNIT............................................................................ B457-6 1.10 PICKUP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS.............................. B457-7 1.11 UPPER LIMIT, PAPER END 1, AND RELAY SENSORS................ B457-7
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................B457-8 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. B457-8 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................. B457-9 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS................................ B457-10 2.4 PAPER FEED................................................................................... B457-11 2.5 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICKUP ROLLER RELEASE............ B457-12 2.6 TRAY LIFT........................................................................................ B457-13 2.7 PAPER AMOUNT DETECTION ....................................................... B457-14 2.8 PAPER END DETECTION OF PAPER FEED SIDE......................... B457-15 2.9 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT.......................................................... B457-16
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B386)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B386-1 1.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS ......................................................... B386-1 1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT....................................................................... B386-2 1.3 LEFT COVER ..................................................................................... B386-2 1.4 PICK-UP ROLLER.............................................................................. B386-3 1.5 FEED BELT ........................................................................................ B386-3 1.6 SEPARATION ROLLER ..................................................................... B386-4 1.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS ............................ B386-4 1.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR.................. B386-5 1.9 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE .................................................................... B386-6
DF Feed Clutch .............................................................................. B386-6 Pick-up Solenoid ............................................................................ B386-6 Transport Motor.............................................................................. B386-6 DF Feed Motor ............................................................................... B386-6
1.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR............................................................... B386-7 1.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ...................... B386-8
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................B386-9 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. B386-9 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................ B386-10 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.................................. B386-11 2.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B386-12 2.5 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.......................................................... B386-13 2.6 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE........................................................ B386-16 2.7 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION........................................................... B386-17 2.8 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT ................................................ B386-18
2.8.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ................................................... B386-18 2.8.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS.................................................. B386-19 2.8.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR................................... B386-20
xi
2.9 STAMP ............................................................................................. B386-21 2.10 TIMING CHART.............................................................................. B386-22 2.11 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION................................................ B386-23 2.12 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT................................................. B386-24
3. SERVICE TABLES..............................................................B386-25 3.1 DIP SWITCHES................................................................................ B386-25
INTERCHANGE UNIT (B418)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B481-1 1.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT........................................................ B481-1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION....................................................B481-2 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. B481-2 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT.......................... B481-3 2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM ........................................................ B481-4
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit (for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge Unit, or the Finisher)....................................................................... B481-4 To the 1-bin Tray............................................................................ B481-4 To the Duplex Unit ......................................................................... B481-4
1-BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B480-1 1.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL............................................................. B480-1
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION....................................................B480-2 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. B480-2 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................. B480-3 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.................................... B480-3 2.4 BASIC OPERATION........................................................................... B480-4
SHIFT TRAY UNIT (B510)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B510-1 1.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT......................................................... B510-1
1.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL ......................................................... B510-1 1.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT .................................................. B510-1
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT .......... B510-2 1.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR ............................................. B510-2 1.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR................................. B510-2
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................B510-3 2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..................................................................... B510-3 2.2 BASIC OPERATION........................................................................... B510-4 2.3 PRIMARY MECHANISMS .................................................................. B510-5
xii
2.3.1 TRAY SHIFT .............................................................................. B510-5 2.3.2 HALF TURN DETECTION ......................................................... B510-6
BY-PASS TRAY UNIT (B490)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B490-1 1.1 PICKUP/FEED ROLLER..................................................................... B490-1 1.2 PAPER FEED CLUTCH...................................................................... B490-2 1.3 REVERSE ROLLER ........................................................................... B490-2 1.4 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD......................................................... B490-3
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................B490-4 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. B490-4 2.2 PAPER FEED..................................................................................... B490-5
2.2.1 DRIVE........................................................................................ B490-5 Power Source................................................................................. B490-5 Rollers............................................................................................ B490-5
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MECHANISM ..................................................... B490-6 Pickup Roller Mechanism............................................................... B490-6 Paper End Detection ...................................................................... B490-6
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION................................................................. B490-7
DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B509-1 1.1 EXTERIOR COVER............................................................................ B509-1 1.2 ENTRANCE/EXIT SENSORS............................................................. B509-1 1.3 INVERTER MOTOR ........................................................................... B509-2 1.4 CONTROLLER BOARD...................................................................... B509-2 1.5 TRANSPORT MOTOR ....................................................................... B509-2
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................B509-3 2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................ B509-3 2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................. B509-4 2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. B509-5 2.4 DUPLEX PAPER FEED ORDER........................................................ B509-6
2.4.1 LONGER THAN A4/LT LEF....................................................... B509-6 2.4.2 UP TO A4/LT LEF...................................................................... B509-7
2.5 REVERSE MECHANISM.................................................................... B509-8
BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B482-1 1.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT............................... B482-1 1.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............................................. B482-2 1.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................................................... B482-2
xiii
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .................................................B482-3 2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. B482-3 2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. B482-4 2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................. B482-5 2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.................................... B482-6 2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM ........................................................ B482-7
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B408-1 1.1 MAIN PCB .......................................................................................... B408-1 1.2 STAPLER UNIT .................................................................................. B408-2 1.3 MOTORS............................................................................................ B408-3
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR .......................................................................... B408-3 1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .................................................................... B408-3 1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ................. B408-4 1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................ B408-4
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS................................................................. B408-5 1.4.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................... B408-5 1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR ........................................................ B408-6 1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR........................................... B408-6 1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR..................................................... B408-7 1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ..................................................... B408-7
2. TROUBLESHOOTING...........................................................B408-8 2.1 JAM DETECTION............................................................................... B408-8
3. SERVICE TABLES................................................................B408-9 3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS.................................................................... B408-9
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ...............................................B408-10 4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................... B408-10 4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................ B408-11 4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.................................. B408-13 4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... B408-15 4.5 JUNCTION GATES........................................................................... B408-16
Upper Tray Mode ......................................................................... B408-16 Sort/Stack Mode........................................................................... B408-16 Staple Mode................................................................................. B408-16
4.6 UPPER TRAY................................................................................... B408-17 4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS....................................... B408-18 4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ........................................................... B408-19 4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM..................... B408-20 4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE ....................................................................... B408-21 4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM................................................................. B408-22 4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM.................................. B408-23 4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM.................................................. B408-24
xiv
500-SHEET FINISHER (B458)
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..................................B458-1 1.1 EXTERIOR ......................................................................................... B458-1
Front Cover .................................................................................... B458-2 1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE/PAPER EXIT UNIT ............................... B458-4 1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE.............................................................. B458-5 1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR/PADDLE ROLLER SOLENOID ................ B458-5 1.5 STAPLER UNIT .................................................................................. B458-6 1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT......................................................................... B458-6 1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER........................................................ B458-7 1.8 MAIN MOTOR .................................................................................... B458-7 1.9 JOGGER MOTOR .............................................................................. B458-8 1.10 CONTROL BOARD........................................................................... B458-8 1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT ....................................................................... B458-9
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ...............................................B458-10 2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION.............................................. B458-10
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .......................................................... B458-10 Mechanical Component Layout.................................................... B458-10 Drive Layout ................................................................................. B458-11
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................... B458-12 2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS....................... B458-13
2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS............................................ B458-14 2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM................................................. B458-14
Stack Height Detection................................................................. B458-14 Output Tray Up/Down Mechanism ............................................... B458-15
2.2.2 PAPER FEED .......................................................................... B458-16 Straight Feed Out Mode............................................................... B458-16 Shift Sorting Mode........................................................................ B458-17 Stapling Mode .............................................................................. B458-19
2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS .................................................................. B458-20 2.2.4 ERROR DETECTION ............................................................... B458-20
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................Spec-1 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MAIN UNIT) ........................................ Spec-1 2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION .............................................................. Spec-3
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS............................................................. Spec-3 2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................. Spec-5
ARDF ............................................................................................. Spec-5 Bridge Unit ..................................................................................... Spec-5 By-pass Tray Unit........................................................................... Spec-6 Duplex Unit..................................................................................... Spec-6 Interchange Unit............................................................................. Spec-6
xv
LCT ................................................................................................ Spec-7 Paper Tray Unit .............................................................................. Spec-7 Shift Tray Unit ................................................................................ Spec-7 1-Bin Tray Unit ............................................................................... Spec-8 500-Sheet Finisher......................................................................... Spec-8 1000-sheet Finisher ....................................................................... Spec-9 Upper Tray ..................................................................................... Spec-9 Lower Tray ..................................................................................... Spec-9
26 July 2002 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1-1
Inst
alla
tion1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) (humidity to be 54% at 32°C, 89.6°F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% Rh (temperature to be 27°C, 80.6°F at 80%)
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (keep the machine out of direct sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person or more 5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10 – 6 oz/yd3) 6. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:
1) Direct cool air from an air conditioner 2) Direct heat from a heater
7. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be exposed to corrosive gas. 8. Install the machine at a location lower than 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. 9. Install the machine on a strong, level base. 10. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration. 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 26 July 2002
1-2
1.1.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS
!CAUTION 1. Insert the plug firmly in the outlet. 2. Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord. 3. Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz, More than 12 A 220 ∼ 240 V, 50/60 Hz, More than 8 A 110 V, 50/60 Hz, More than 13A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10% 3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord. 1.1.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
B051I126.WMF
A: Over 100 mm (4") B: Over 100 mm (4") C: Over 550 mm (22") D: Over 750 mm (29.6")
A C
B
D
26 July 2002 COPIER (B051/B052)
1-3
Inst
alla
tion
1.2 COPIER (B051/B052) 1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
!CAUTION Rating voltage for peripherals. Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
B051I130.WMF
1. ADF 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
2. Finisher 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
3. By-pass Tray 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
4. Duplex Unit 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V
COPIER (B051/B052) 26 July 2002
1-4
1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Unpack the copier
Place the copier on the Paper Tray Unit or LCTInstall the Paper Tray Unit or LCTInstall the copier
Install the Memory Unit
Install the By-pass Tray
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Install the Interchange Unit
Install the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit
Yes No
Install the Shift Tray
Yes No
Install the Bridge Unit
Install the Finisher
Yes No
Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit, LCT, or Finisher?
Does the user require the Memory Unit
Does the user require the By-pass Tray?
Install the ARDF or Platen Cover (if required)
Does the user require the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit ?
Does the user require the Shift Tray?
Does the user require the Finisher?
B051I500.WMF
26 July 2002 COPIER (B051/B052)
1-5
Inst
alla
tion
1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
No. Description Q’ty 1 Paper Tray Decal 1 2 Model Name Decal 1 3 NECR 1 4 Factory Data Sheet 1 5 Filter Duct 3 6 Filter 3 7 Caution Decal – Power/Paper 1 8 Decal – Copy prohibition 1 9 Manual Holder 1
10 Operating Instructions – System Setting 1 11 Operating Instructions – Copy Reference 1
COPIER (B051/B052) 26 July 2002
1-6
1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
If the optional paper tray or the optional LCT will be installed at the same time, place the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and the other options. NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused when the machine is moved to another location in the future. 1. Remove the tapes. 2. Open the front cover [A] and remove the shipping retainer [B].
B051I101.WMF
B051I138.WMF
B051I125.WMF
[A]
[B]
26 July 2002 COPIER (B051/B052)
1-7
Inst
alla
tion
3. Open the right cover [A], and remove the red tags [B]. 4. Open the left cover [C] (! x 2), and remove the red tags [D]. 5. Pull out all development units [E] (" x 1 each).
B051I134.WMF
B051I124.WMF B051I110.WMF[C]
[D]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[B]
[E]
COPIER (B051/B052) 26 July 2002
1-8
6. Peel off the toner cartridge seal [A]. 7. Reinstall the toner cartridge in the development unit.
B051I133.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 COPIER (B051/B052)
1-9
Inst
alla
tion
8. Keep the development unit level and shake the development unit about 10
times from side to side. NOTE: 1) Do not touch the development roller or the development roller gear.
2) Use caution not to drop the cartridge or to damage it. 3) If the cartridge has not been shaken well, the machine takes a
longer time to initialize the development unit, or an error message or SC350 is displayed. When either of them is displayed, turn the main switch off and on.
9. Engage the special tool [A] (distributed with the machine) with the development roller gear at the rear [B].
10. Turn the tool clockwise (approximately 5 times) until the toner covers the whole area of the development roller [C]. NOTE: If the toner does not cover the whole area of the development roller,
redo step 8 to 10.
B051I315.WMF
B051I409.WMF
[A]
[C]
Rear view
[B]
COPIER (B051/B052) 26 July 2002
1-10
11. Reinstall the development units, and close the left cover. NOTE: A white line or band may appear on one end of the paper if a
development is incorrectly installed. To correct this, pull out the development unit partially (about 30 mm) and slowly reinstall it.
12. Remove the oil tank cover [A] (1 clip), and fill the oil tank to the maximum line. NOTE: Do not fill the oil tank past the arrow [B].
B051I135.WMF
[A]
[B]
26 July 2002 COPIER (B051/B052)
1-11
Inst
alla
tion
13. Install the filters [A] and ducts [B] as shown. 14. Attach the appropriate model name decal [C] to the front cover. 15. Pull the paper tray out, and adjust the side guides and end guide to match the
paper size. NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully, then push down the
green lock at the rear inside the tray. 16. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decals [D] to the paper trays.
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional LCT. Keep any remaining decals for use with these optional units.
B051I137.WMF
B051I128.WMF
B051I131.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[D]
[C]
COPIER (B051/B052) 26 July 2002
1-12
17. If the optional bridge unit will not be installed: Swing the sensor feeler [A] out.
18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen cover (see ARDF Installation or Platen Cover Installation).
19. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically performs the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the Start button LED turns green.
20. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes). 21. Perform Automatic Color Calibration (ACC).
NOTE: Since this machine has been subject to color adjustment using Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) at the factory, there is no need to make automatic color calibration again if the customer is satisfied with the image sample. If the customer is not satisfied, do the following. 1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode – Maintenance – ACC – Start).2) Place the printout on the exposure glass. 3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart. Then, close
the ADF or platen cover. 4) Press “Start Scanning” on the LCD panel. The machine performs the
ACC. 22. Make sure that the sample image has been copied normally. 23. After installing the machine and all options, and making all test copies, initialize
the total counter (SP 7-825) if required by the service contract.
B051I129.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)
1-13
Inst
alla
tion
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456) 1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 Right Stand Bracket 1 2 Left Stand Bracket 1 3 Securing Bracket 2 4 Front Stand 1 5 Rear Stand 1 6 Screw - M4x10 4 7 Knob Screw 2 8 Stepped Screw 2
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the strips of tape.
B456I001.WMF
B456I002.WMF
1 2 3
4 5
6 7 8
PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456) 26 July 2002
1-14
2. Remove the paper trays [A] from the paper tray unit and remove the shipping
retainers. 3. Install the front stand [B] (! x 2). 4. Install the rear stand [C]. 5. Attach two stand brackets [D] (! x 1 each).
B456I103.WMF
B456I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[D]
26 July 2002 PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456)
1-15
Inst
alla
tion
6. Set the copier [A] on the paper tray unit [B]. 7. Remove the paper trays [C] from the copier and secure the paper tray unit
(! x 2). 8. Attach a securing bracket [D] to each side of the paper tray unit (! x 1 each).
B456I105.WMF
B456I102.WMF
B456I106.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[D]
PAPER TRAY UNIT (B456) 26 July 2002
1-16
9. Reinstall the paper trays and attach the appropriate paper tray number decal
[A] to the paper tray. NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier. 10. Load paper into the paper trays. 11. Turn on the main switch. 12. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
B456I004.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 LCT (B457)
1-17
Inst
alla
tion
1.4 LCT (B457) 1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 Right Stand Bracket 1 2 Left Stand Bracket 1 3 Securing Bracket 2 4 Front Stand 1 5 Rear Stand 1 6 Screw - M4x10 4 7 Knob Screw 2 8 Stepped Screw 2
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the strips of tape.
B457I151.WMF
B457I001.WMF
1 2 3
4 5
6 7 8
LCT (B457) 26 July 2002
1-18
2. While pressing the stopper [A] attached to the guide rail, pull out the large
capacity tray [B]. 3. Install the front stand [C] (! x 2). 4. Install the rear stand [D]. 5. Attach two stand brackets [E] (! x 1 each).
B457I003.WMF
B457I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[E]
[D][E]
[C]
26 July 2002 LCT (B457)
1-19
Inst
alla
tion
6. Set the copier [A] on the LCT [B]. 7. Remove the paper trays [C] from the copier and secure the LCT (! x 2). 8. Attach a securing bracket [D] to each side of the LCT (! x 1 each).
B457I006.WMF
B457I002.WMF
B457I156.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[D]
LCT (B457) 26 July 2002
1-20
9. Reinstall the paper trays and attach the appropriate paper tray number decal
[A] to the LCT. NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier. 10. Load paper into the LCT. 11. Turn on the main switch. 12. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
B457I005.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B386)
1-21
Inst
alla
tion
1.5 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B386) 1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 Scale Guide 1 2 DF Exposure Glass 1 3 Stud Screw 2 4 Knob Screw 2 5 Original Size Decal 2 6 Screwdriver Tool 1
1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the strips of tape.
B386I500.WMF
B386I101.WMF
1
2
4
5
3 6
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B386) 26 July 2002
1-22
2. Remove the left scale [A] (! x 2). 3. Peel off the backing [B] of the double-sided tape attached to the glass holder. 4. Place the DF exposure glass [C] on the glass holder.
NOTE: When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point [D] is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown.
5. Peel off the backing [E] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the scale guide [F], then install the scale guide [F] (! x 2 removed in step 2).
6. Install two stud screws [G]. 7. Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown. 8. Secure the DF unit with two screws [H]. 9. Connect the cable [I] to the copier.
B386I107.WMF
B386I108.WMF
[H]
[I]
[H]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
[F][G]
[G]
26 July 2002 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B386)
1-23
Inst
alla
tion
10. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass. 11. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the
exposure glass. 12. Close the ARDF. 13. Attach the appropriate scale decal [C] as shown. 14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works
properly. 15. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading
edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew (refer to Replacements and Adjustments – Copy Adjustments).
B386I110.WMF B386I111.WMF
B386I501.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481) 26 July 2002
1-24
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481) 1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 Interchange Unit 1
B481I101.WMF
26 July 2002 INTERCHANGE UNIT (B481)
1-25
Inst
alla
tion
1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes. 2. Open the right cover [A] of the copier. 3. Open cover [B] and remove it.
NOTE: Pull down in the direction of the arrow. Do not pull directly outwards. 4. Remove the connector cover [C] (! x 1) 5. Open the cover [D] of the interchange unit. 6. Install the interchange unit [E] (" x 1).
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the harness at the front side (near [E] in the drawing). This harness is not used in this procedure, but is used when installing another option.
7. Secure the interchange unit with the knob screws [F]. 8. Reinstall the connector cover [G] which was removed in step 4.
B481I102.WMF
B481I103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
[F]
[F]
[G]
1-BIN TRAY UNIT (B480) 26 July 2002
1-26
1.7 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (B480) 1.7.1 ACCESORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 1-Bin Tray Unit 1 2 Tray 1 3 Sub-Tray 1 4 Tray Guide 1 5 Shield Mylar 1 6 Sub Paper Guide 1 7 Paper Guide 1 8 Tapping Screw M3x8 2
B480I101.WMF
1
2
34
5
6
7 8
26 July 2002 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)
1-27
Inst
alla
tion
1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: Before installing this 1-bin tray unit, the optional interchange unit (B416) must be installed.
1. Remove all tapes. 2. If the optional bridge unit has been installed, open the right jam removal cover
[A] of the bridge unit. If the optional bridge unit is not installed, skip this step.
B480I107.WMF
[A]
1-BIN TRAY UNIT (B480) 26 July 2002
1-28
3. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the shield mylar [A]. Then attach the shield mylar to the 1-bin unit.
4. If the front right cover [B] is installed, remove it (! x 1). 5. Remove the cover [C]. 6. Disconnect the connector [D] and remove the LED board [E]. 7. Install the 1-bin tray unit [F] (! x 1).
B480I103.WMF
B480I102.WMF
B480I108.WMF
[B]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[A]
26 July 2002 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (B480)
1-29
Inst
alla
tion
8. Install the LED board [A] on the front right cover (! x 1). 9. Reinstall the front right cover [B] (" x 2, ! x 1). 10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the paper guide [C].
Then attach the paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as shown. 11. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape attached to the sub paper guide
[D]. Then attach the sub paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as shown.
12. Install the tray guide [E]. 13. Install the tray [F]. 14. Install the sub-tray [G]. 15. Turn on the main power switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
B480I106.WMF
B480I104.WMF
B480I109.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
SHIFT TRAY 26 July 2002
1-30
1.8 SHIFT TRAY 1.8.1 COMPONENT CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. No. Description Q’ty 1 Shift Tray Unit 1 2 Paper Guide - Large 1 3 Paper Guide - Small 2 4 Stepped Screw 1
1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page). 2. Remove the covers [A] (! x 1). 3. Replace screw [B] with a stepped screw [C]. 4. Install the large paper guide [D] and two small paper guides [E].
B510I101.WMF
B510I102.WMF
1
2 34
[A]
[D] [E] [E]
[B]
[C]
26 July 2002 SHIFT TRAY
1-31
Inst
alla
tion
5. Remove the rear cover [A] (! x 2). 6. Pass the harnesses [B] through the opening [C], and install the shift tray unit
[D], as shown. NOTE: 1) Set the shift tray on the stepped screw.
2) The shift tray must be installed under the paper guides [E] installed in step 4.
B510I103.WMF
B510I110.WMF
[C] [B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
SHIFT TRAY 26 July 2002
1-32
7. Connect the harnesses [A], as shown. 8. Turn on the main power switch. 9. Check the shift tray operation.
B510I104.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490)
1-33
Inst
alla
tion
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490) 1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 By-pass Tray Unit 1 2 Tapping Screw 3
1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes (see the diagram at the top of the page). 2. Remove the entrance cover [A] (!x 2).
B490I001.WMF
B490I113.WMF
1
2
[A]
BY-PASS FEED UNIT (B490) 26 July 2002
1-34
3. Install the by-pass tray unit [A] (! x 3, " x 1). 4. Turn the main power switch on and check the by-pass tray function. 5. Make a copy from the by-pass tray. Then check the registration.
B490I114.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
1-35
Inst
alla
tion
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT (B509) 1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 Duplex Unit 1 2 Upper Bracket 1 3 Rear Holder Bracket 1 4 Front Holder Bracket 1 5 Clip 2 6 Tapping Screw - M4x6 3 7 Tapping Screw - M3x6 1
B509I101.WMF
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
DUPLEX UNIT (B509) 26 July 2002
1-36
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the duplex unit, the optional interchange unit (B481) must be installed.
1. Remove all tapes (see the previous page). 2. Remove five covers [A] (! x 1). 3. Install three brackets [B] (! x 1 each - M4x6).
B509I102.WMF
B509I103.WMF
[A]
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
26 July 2002 DUPLEX UNIT (B509)
1-37
Inst
alla
tion
4. Set the duplex unit [A] on the brackets [B] (1 clip). 5. Attach the link [C] to the shaft [D] and secure it with the clip. 6. Remove the connector cover [E] (! x 1). 7. Connect the cable [F] and secure the grounding wire [G] (! x 1). 8. Install the connector cover. 9. Turn on the main power switch and check the duplex unit function.
B509I104.WMF
B509I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[F] [E]
[G]
BRIDGE UNIT (B482) 26 July 2002
1-38
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT (B482) 1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 Bridge Unit 1 2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 3 Front Joint Bracket 1 4 Knob Screw 1 5 Screw - M3x6 1 6 Screw - M4x14 4
1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes. 2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it away into the machine.
B482I101.WMF
B482I500.WMF
1
2 3 4
5
6
[A]
26 July 2002 BRIDGE UNIT (B482)
1-39
Inst
alla
tion
3. Remove the front right cover [A] (! x 1). 4. Remove two covers [B] (! x 1 each). 5. Remove the rear cover [C] (! x 2). 6. Pass the harnesses [D] through the opening [E], and install the bridge unit [F]
(! x 2). 7. Reinstall the front right cover.
B482I102.WMF
B482I103.WMF
B482I104.WMF
[A]
[B] [B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
BRIDGE UNIT (B482) 26 July 2002
1-40
8. Connect the harnesses [A], as shown. 9. Reinstall the rear cover. 10. When the 1,000-sheet finisher (Machine code: B408) will be installed,
attach the front joint bracket [B] and rear joint bracket [C] (! x 2 each). 11. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
B482I105.WMF
B482I106.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
26 July 2002 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
1-41
Inst
alla
tion
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) 1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty For B022/B027/B031
For B051/B052
1 Front Joint Bracket 1 O X 2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 O X 3 Grounding Plate 1 O X 4 Copy Tray 1 O O 5 Staple Position Decal 1 O O 6 Screw - M4x17 3 O X 7 Knob Screw - M4x10 1 O O 8 Screw - M3x8 1 O X 9 Knob Screw - M3x8 1 O O
O = Necessary, X = Not necessary
B408I101.WMF
12
3
4 5
8 9
6 7
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) 26 July 2002
1-42
1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: The following options must be installed before installing this finisher. - Bridge Unit (B482) - Paper Tray Unit (B456) or LCT (B457) Also, the optional adjustment table (B488) is required.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
B408I102.WMF
B408I103.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408)
1-43
Inst
alla
tion
2. Unpack the adjustment table (B488). 3. Set the finisher [A] on the adjustment table [B] and secure the finisher (! x 1). 4. Install the grounding plate [C], which is in the accessory box for the adjustment
table (! x 2). 5. Open the front door [D], then pull the locking lever [E]. 6. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the
locking lever. 7. Secure the locking lever (1 knob screw - M3x8) and close the front door. 8. Install the copy tray [F] (1 knob screw - M4x10). 9. Connect the finisher cable [G] to the main machine.
B408I152.WMF
B408I114.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) 26 July 2002
1-44
10. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown. 11. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
B408I501.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458)
1-45
Inst
alla
tion
1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458) 1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty 1 Unit Holder 1 2 Entrance Guide 1 3 Shift Tray 1 4 Snap Ring 2 5 Knob Screw 2
B458I102.WMF
1
2
3
4 5
500-SHEET FINISHER (B458) 26 July 2002
1-46
1.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
!CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the 500-sheet finisher, the optional bridge unit (B482) must be installed.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes. 2. Install the entrance guide [A]. 3. Remove the holder cover [B]. Then install the unit holder [C] (2 screws). 4. Re-install the holder cover [B].
B458I101.WMF
B458I103.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
26 July 2002 500-SHEET FINISHER (B458)
1-47
Inst
alla
tion
5. Install the 500-sheet finisher [A] (" x 1). 6. Install the output tray [B] as shown (2 snap rings). 7. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
B458I105.WMF
B458I104.WMF
[B]
[A]
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION 26 July 2002
1-48
1.14 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
1. Install the platen cover [A] (! x 2). 2. Peel off the platen sheet [B] and place it on the exposure glass. 3. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [C] on the
exposure glass. 4. Gently close the platen cover.
B051I520.WMF
B051I408.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
26 July 2002 MEMORY
1-49
Inst
alla
tion
1.15 MEMORY
!CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (! x 2). 2. Remove the cooling fan [B] (! x 2). 3. Remove the PCB fan [C] (! x3, " x 1). 4. Remove the BICU cover [D] (! x 16). 5. Remove the HDD connector cover [E] (! x 4). 6. Disconnect two HDD harnesses [F]. 7. Remove the controller board cover [G] (! x 7).
B051I554.WMF B051I504.WMF
B051I505.WMF
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[A]
[B]
[C]
MEMORY 26 July 2002
1-50
8. Install the memory DIMM [A] on the controller board. 9. Replace the controller board cover and rear cover.
B051I308.WMF
[A]
26 July 2002 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
1-51
Inst
alla
tion
1.16 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
!CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (! x 2). 2. Remove the upper right cover [B] (! x 1). 3. Remove the cap [C]. 4. Install the bracket [D] (! x 2). 5. Connect the cable [E] to the BICU board and route it as shown.
B051I554.WMF
B051I119.WMF
B051I120.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION 26 July 2002
1-52
6. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key counter holder [C].
7. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket (! x 2). 8. Install the key counter cover [D] (! x 2). 9. Install the stepped screw [E]. 1. Connect the cable [F]. 10. Hook the key counter holder assembly [G] onto the stepped screw and secure
it (! x 1). 11. The restricted access control for the key counter is enabled by the Copier UP
mode.
B051I515.WMF
B051I121.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
26 July 2002 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
1-53
Inst
alla
tion
1.17 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
!CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear scale [A] (! x 3), left scale [B] (! x 2), and exposure glass [C]. NOTE: When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown. 2. Install the anti-condensation heater [E] (! x 2, " x 1). 3. Reinstall the exposure glass and the scales.
B051I151.WMF
B051I139.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
TRAY HEATER 26 July 2002
1-54
1.18 TRAY HEATER
!CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (! x 2). 2. Slide out the 1st and 2nd paper trays. 3. Pass the connector [B] through the opening [C]. 4. Install the tray heater assembly [D] (! x 1). 5. Connect the heater cable to the ac cable [E]. 6. Reassemble the machine.
B051I554.WMF
B051I140.WMF
B051I141.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
[D]
[B]
[E]
26 July 2002 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
1-55
Inst
alla
tion
1.19 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
!CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear cover for the main machine [A] (! x 2). 2. Remove the joint brackets [B] (! x 1 each). 3. Remove the rear cover for the optional paper tray unit [C] (! x 2). 4. Slide out the paper trays from the optional paper tray unit. 5. Pass the connector [D] through the opening [E]. 6. Install the tray heater [F] (! x 1).
B456I104.WMF
B456I502.WMF
B456I201.WMF
[D] [E]
[F]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[B]
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) 26 July 2002
1-56
7. Remove the oil bottle [A] and the oil bottle bracket [B] (! x 3). 8. Install the clamp [C]. 9. Connect the cable [D] to the heater cable [E] and the PSU [F]. Then clamp the
cable. 10. Reinstall the rear covers.
B456I202.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
26 July 2002 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
1-57
Inst
alla
tion
1.20 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
!CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the rear cover for the main machine [A] (! x 2). 2. Remove the joint brackets [B] (! x 1 each). 3. Remove the rear cover for the optional LCT [C] (! x 2). 4. Slide out the paper tray [D] from the optional LCT. 5. Push stopper [E] on the right slide rail and remove the paper tray.
B457I554.WMF B457I502.WMF
B457I501.WMF
[C]
[B]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT) 26 July 2002
1-58
6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B]. 7. Install the tray heater [C] (! x 1). 8. Remove the oil bottle [D] and the oil bottle bracket [E] (! x 3). 9. Install the clamp [F]. 10. Connect the cable [G] to the heater cable [H] and the PSU [I]. Then clamp the
cable. 11. Reinstall the rear covers.
B457I251.WMF
B457I201.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
26 July 2002 MAIN UNIT
2-1
Prev
entiv
eM
aint
enan
ce
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2.1 MAIN UNIT 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
B051P112.WMF
Oil supply unit
PCU
Fusing subunit
Charge corona unit
MAIN UNIT 26 July 2002
2-2
2.1.2 PM TABLE After replacing a part, reset the PM counter for that part (SP 7-804).
Abbreviations: Clean, Inspect, Oil replenishment, Replace, Emergency Maintenance Optical System
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 70K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
White plate C Optical cloth 1st mirror C Optical cloth 2nd mirror C Optical cloth 3rd mirror C Optical cloth Front/rear rails C Damp/dry cloth Exposure glass C C Glass cleaner Dust shield glass (laser optics unit) C C Optical cloth and dry
cloth APS sensors C Dry cloth
Around the PCU
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 50K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Charge corona unit R
Replace as whole units or individual parts (listed below).
PCU R T/B waste toner bottle R C Empty the bottle ID sensor C Blower brush O/B waste toner bottle C R C Empty the bottle
.Components Parts of the Charge Corona Unit Prints Developments
70K 80K 120K 50K 120K 240KEM Remarks
Charge Corona Wire R Charge Corona Grid R Charge Corona Cleaner R
Development Unit
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 60K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Development unit-C R Development unit-M R Development unit-Y R Development unit-K R
Refer to the PM counter for each unit (Not reclaimed at the reclamation center)
26 July 2002 MAIN UNIT
2-3
Prev
entiv
eM
aint
enan
ce
Paper feed System
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Idle roller (registration) C Damp/dry cloth Registration sensor C Damp/dry cloth Transport guide C Damp/dry cloth Feed roller (main unit) R Vertical transport roller C Damp/dry cloth Friction pad (main unit) R
Fusing Unit
Prints Developments 60K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Fusing subunit R Oil supply unit R
Replace as whole units or individual parts (listed below).
Thermistor I Fusing oil O
.Components Parts of the Fusing Sub Unit and Oil Supply Unit Prints Developments
60K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240KEM Remarks
Oil supply pad R Sponge roller R Fusing cleaning roller R Rear oil absorber R Front oil absorber R Front oil tank absorber R Long oil tank absorber R Rear oil tank absorber R Fusing cover absorber R Oil supply roller R Oiling roller R Pressure cleaning roller R Fusing belt unit R Pressure roller R Pressure roller strippers R Idle gear – 28Z/35Z R Gear – 47Z R Front spring plate R Rear spring plate R
MAIN UNIT 26 July 2002
2-4
Filters
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Exhaust filters R Ozone filter R
By-pass Tray Unit
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Feed roller R Pickup roller R Separation roller R Friction pad C Damp cloth
26 July 2002 OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE
2-5
Prev
entiv
eM
aint
enan
ce
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT PM TABLE Abbreviations: Clean, Inspect, Oil replenishment, Replace, Emergency Maintenance Duplex Unit
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Idle roller (inverter) C Damp/dry cloth Idle roller (vertical transport) C Damp/dry cloth
Auto-reverse Document Feeder
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Pickup roller R Feed belt R Separation roller R Stamp I ADF exposure glass C C Damp/dry cloth Platen cover C C Damp/dry cloth
Paper Tray Unit
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Pickup roller R Feed roller R Separation roller R
Large Capacity Tray
Prints Developments 70K 80K 120K 75K 120K 240K
EM Remarks
Pickup roller R Feed roller R Separation roller R
26 July 2002 SPECIAL TOOLS
3-1
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
!CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section.
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.
☛ : See or Refer to ! : Screws " : Connector # : Clip ring $ : E-ring
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number Description Q’ty A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs/set) 1 N8036701 Flash Memory Card - 4MB 1 A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1 C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1
3.2 FILTERS
1. Filter covers [B, D, and E] 2. Exhaust filters [A, C, G, and I] 3. Filter holder [F] 4. Ozone filter [H]
B051R819.WMF
[A] [B] [C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G] [H]
[I]
SCANNER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-2
3.3 SCANNER UNIT 3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
1. Rear scale [A] (! x 3) 2. Left scale [B] (! x 2)
NOTE: After replacing the left scale, adjust the scanner white level (☛ 3.14).
3. Exposure glass [C]
NOTE: When reassembling, position the glass marker [D] at the rear-left corner.
3.3.2 APS SENSORS
1. Exposure glass (☛ 3.3.1) 2. Original length sensor 1 [A]
(! x 1, " x 1) 3. Original length sensor 2 [B]
(! x 1, " x 1) 4. Original width sensor [C]
(! x 1, " x1)
B051R001.WMF
B051R003.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
26 July 2002 SCANNER UNIT
3-3
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.3.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
1. Exposure glass (☛ 3.3.1) 2. Rear cover (☛ 3.4.2) 3. Scanner right cover [A] (! x 1) 4. Inner cover [B] (! x 4)
5. Lens block assembly [C] (! x 4, " x 4) NOTE: Do not remove the paint-
locked screws. 6. After reassembling, input the data
in accordance with the data sheet included in the spare SBU unit (☛ SP4-540). Refer to the diagram on the next page. • Row No. 1: Numbers 1 to 6 –
please ignore • Row No. 2: Numbers 7 to 10 –
please store in the following SP modes 7: SP 4-540-001 8: SP 4-540-002 9: SP 4-540-003 10: SP 4-540-004
• Row No. 3: Numbers 11 to 14 – please store in the following SP modes 11: SP 4-540-021 12: SP 4-540-022 13: SP 4-540-023 14: SP 4-540-024
• Before inputting the number, check whether it is + or – (look at the data sheet), then input a +ve or –ve number accordingly.
7. Check the registrations (☛ SP4-010/011 Chapter 3, Copy adjustments)
NOTE: After replacing the left scale, adjust the scanner white level (☛ 3.14).
B051R004.WMF
B051R005.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
SCANNER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-4
B051S999.PCX
26 July 2002 SCANNER UNIT
3-5
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.3.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER
1. Lens block assembly (☛ 3.3.3) 2. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A]
(! x 2, " x 2) 3.3.5 SCANNER LAMP
1. Exposure glass (☛ 3.3.1) 2. Rear cover (☛ 3.4.2) 3. Operation panel [A]
(! x 5, " x 1) 4. Scanner right cover [B] (! x 1) 5. Scanner left cover [C] (! x 1) 6. Scanner rear cover [D] (! x 1)
7. Left frame [E] (! x 2) 8. Front frame [F] (! x 5)
B051R006.WMF
B051R002.WMF
B051R009.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[F]
[E]
[A]
[D]
SCANNER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-6
9. Lamp guard [A] (! x 2) 10. Pulley [B]
NOTE: Use caution not to bend the pulley guides.
11. Push down the part [C], then slide out the scanner lamp.
12. Slide out the scanner lamp [D] and unhook it from the clamps [E]. NOTE: After replacing the
scanner lamp, adjust the scanner white level (☛ 3.14).
Reassembling
1. Take up the cable slack. NOTE: Make sure the cable is not dangling and the wires are not crossed.
2. Adjust the cable clamp position [F] if necessary. NOTE: Do not open the clamp.
B051R012.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
26 July 2002 SCANNER UNIT
3-7
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.3.6 SCANNER I/O BOARD
1. Scanner right cover and scanner rear cover (☛ 3.3.5)
2. Scanner I/O board [A] (! x 6, " x 7) 3.3.7 SCANNER MOTOR
1. Scanner I/O board (☛ 3.3.6) 2. Scanner motor [A] (! x 2, Spring x 1) 3. Timing belt [B] 3.3.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE
1. Front frame (☛ 3.3.5) 2. To make reassembly easy, slide the
first scanner to the right (☛ Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire).
3. Front scanner wire clamp [A] 4. Front scanner wire bracket [B]
(! x 1) 5. Front scanner wire and scanner drive
pulley [C] (! x 1)
B051R007.WMF
B051R008.WMF
B051R943.WMF
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B] [C]
SCANNER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-8
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire
1. Pass the end with the ball [A] through the left square hole from the front.
2. Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the notch, as shown by the arrow.
3. Pass the ball end [A] through the notch on the right.
4. Wind the end with the ring [C] clockwise three times; wind the ball end [A] counterclockwise five times. NOTE: The two red marks [D]
should meet when you have done this.
5. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape, so you can easily handle the pulley and wire during installation.
6. Install the drive pulley on the shaft [E]. NOTE: Do not screw the pulley
onto the shaft yet. 7. Insert the ball end into the slit [F],
with the end going via the rear track of the left pulley [G] and the rear track of the movable pulley [H].
B051R944.WMF
B051R945.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F] [G] [H]
26 July 2002 SCANNER UNIT
3-9
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
8. Hook the ring end onto the front scanner wire bracket [I], with the end going via the front track of the right pulley [J] and the front track of the movable pulley [K]. NOTE: Do not screw the
scanner wire bracket in place yet.
9. Remove the tape from the drive pulley.
10. Insert a scanner positioning pin [L] through the 2nd carriage hole [M] and the left holes [N] in the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [O] through the 1st carriage hole [P] and the right holes in the front rail [Q].
11. Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail.
12. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [R].
13. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [S].
14. Install the scanner wire clamp [T]. 15. Pull out the positioning pins. NOTE: 1) After removing the positioning pins, make sure the 1st and 2nd
carriages move smoothly. If they do not, repeat steps 10 through 15. 2) After replacing the carriage, adjust the scanner white level (☛ 3.14).
B051R946.WMF
B051R947.WMF
[I]
[K]
[L]
[M]
[N]
[O]
[P]
[Q]
[R]
[S]
[T]
[J]
SCANNER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-10
3.3.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE
1. Exposure glass (☛ 3.3.1) 2. Scanner motor (☛ 3.3.7) 3. Left frame (☛ 3.3.5) 4. Rear frame [A] (! x 7, " x 1) 5. Rear rail frame [B] (! x 5, " x 1) 6. To make reassembly easy, slide
to the right (☛ Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire).
7. Rear scanner wire clamp [C] 8. Rear scanner wire bracket [D] (! x 1) 9. Scanner motor gear [E] (! x 1) 10. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive
pulley [F] (! x 1)
B051R010.WMF
B051R949.WMF
[A]
[C][D]
[E]
[F]
[B]
26 July 2002 SCANNER UNIT
3-11
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire
1. Pass the end with the ball [A] through the right square hole from the front.
2. Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the notch, as shown by the arrow.
3. Pass the ball end [A] through the drive pulley notch.
4. Wind the end with the ring [C] counterclockwise five times; wind the ball end clockwise three times. NOTE: The two red marks [D]
should meet when you have done this.
5. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape, so you can easily handle the pulley and wire during installation.
6. Install the drive pulley on the shaft. NOTE: Do not screw the pulley onto the shaft yet.
7. Install the wire. NOTE: The winding pattern is a mirror image of that of the front scanner wire.
8. Perform steps 10 through 15 in “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire”.
B051R940.WMF
[B]
[A] [C]
[D]
LASER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-12
3.4 LASER UNIT
!WARNING Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION
!DANGER Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This printer uses a class-1 laser beam with a wavelength of 650 nm and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
B051R106.WMF
26 July 2002 LASER UNIT
3-13
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.4.2 LASER UNIT
1. Rear cover [A] (! x 2) 2. Connector cover [B] (! x 1) 3. Lower rear cover [C] (! x 2)
4. Fan [D] (! x 5) 5. BICU cover [E] (! x 11)
6. Flat cable [F] 7. LD unit cables [G] (" x 2)
B051R101.WMF
B051R924.WMF
B051R102.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[F]
[D]
[E]
LASER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-14
8. Open the left cover [A] (! x 2). 9. ID chip connectors [B] (" x 4) 10. Development units [C] x 4 (☛ 3.5)
11. Left cover [D] 12. Lower left cover [E] (! x 3)
13. Open the front cover. 14. Dust shield glass cleaner lever [F]
NOTE: The dust shield glass cleaner lever is the blue lever at the left side of the charge corona unit (☛ 3.6.3).
B051R103.WMF
B051R104.WMF
B051R909.WMF
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[F]
26 July 2002 LASER UNIT
3-15
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
15. LD cover [A] (! x 2) 16. Laser unit [B] (! x 5, Flat cable x 1)
NOTE: When reassembling, connect the flat cable with the blue side down.
Adjusting for Image Skew
1. Positioning pin [A] (! x 1) 2. Loosen ! (x 4) [B]. 3. Adjust the position of the laser optics
housing unit (☛ Adjustment). 4. Fasten ! (x 4) [B].
NOTE: After changing the position of the laser optics housing unit, do not reinstall the positioning pin. Keep the pin in a safe place.
NOTE: When the image skews as shown
on the right, move the unit 1 mm in the direction of the black arrow as shown in the diagram above and to the right.
B051R105.WMF
B051R107.WMF
1mm
Paper feed(A3 SEF)
B051R901.WMF
[A]
[B]
[☛ NOTE]
[A]
[B]
LASER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-16
Adjustment Mag. Shift Error: LD1-2 SP2-951-1 SP2-951-2
–11.8 ∼ –10.4 8 0 –10.3 ∼ –9.0 7 0 –8.9 ∼ –7.6 6 0 –7.5 ∼ –6.2 5 0 –6.1 ∼ –4.8 4 0 –4.7 ∼ –3.4 3 0 –3.3 ∼ –2.0 2 0 –1.9 ∼ –1.0 1 0 –0.9 ∼ 1.0 0 0 1.1 ∼ 2.0 0 1 2.1 ∼ 3.4 0 2 3.5 ∼ 4.8 0 3 4.9 ∼ 6.2 0 4 6.3 ∼ 7.6 0 5 7.7 ∼ 9.0 0 6 9.1 ∼ 10.4 0 7 10.5 ∼ 11.8 0 8
Table 1
D-Phase Adjustment This adjustment corrects the difference in density on the left and right sides of the paper. The data sheet (distributed with the laser unit) is necessary for this adjustment. After replacing the laser unit, do the following adjustment.
NOTE: 1) If the D-phase adjustment is not made, a difference in the density may be seen. This difference can be conspicuous when the gray scale in the Color Chart C-4 is copied or when an original is repeatedly copied.
2) The D-phase adjustment is necessary whenever a difference in the density is seen. Keep the data sheet inside the front cover for future use.
1. Print out the test pattern with SP5-955-6 (☛ 5.1.3).
2. Check if horizontal black stripes can be seen.
a) If stripes cannot be seen (Figure 2), the D-phase adjustment is not required.
b) If stripes can be seen (Figure 1), the D-phase adjustment is required. Go on to the next step.
3. See the value of “Mag. Shift Error: LD1-2” below the bar code on the data sheet, and find the range in Table 1 which includes the value.
4. Find the corresponding values of “Adjustment” in Table 1, and input them in SP2-951-1 and SP2-951-2 respectively.
For example, when the value of “Mag. Shift Error: LD1-2” on the data sheet is “–4.0”, enter “3” in SP2-951-1 and enter “0” in SP2-951-2.
5. Print out the test pattern with SP5-955-6.
6. Check if vertical black stripes can be seen.
Figure 1 Figure 2
B051R902.WMF
Feed direction
26 July 2002 LASER UNIT
3-17
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
1. Print out the test pattern with SP5-955-1, then select pattern 15 (☛ 5.1.3).
2. Check if vertical black stripes can be seen.
a) If stripes cannot be seen (Figure 2), laser beam pitch adjustment is not required.
b) If stripes can be seen (Figure 1), laser beam pitch adjustment is required. Go on to the next step.
3. To adjust the laser beam pitch, tighten or loosen the screw [A] on the LD unit holder.
4. Print out the test pattern with SP5-955-1.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the black stripes disappear (Figure 2).
Figure 1 Figure 2
B051R902.WMF
B051R820.WMF
[A]
Feed direction
LASER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-18
3.4.3 POLYGONAL MIRROR MOTOR AND LSD
!WARNING Do not touch any edges of the polygon mirror, spring, or bracket. These edges can cause serious injury.
1. Development units, LD cover (☛ 3.4.2) 2. Cover [A] (! x 1)
NOTE: Before removing the cover, clean the cover to prevent toner from entering into the unit.
3. Polygonal mirror motor [B] (" x 1, ! x 4) NOTE: Do not touch the mirror
surface. 4. Synch. detection board (LSD) [C]
(" x 1, ! x 1)
B051R904.WMF
B051R905.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
26 July 2002 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3-19
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
!CAUTION Do not touch the development unit sleeves or ID chip terminals.
1. Open the left cover [A] (! x 2) 2. ID chip connector [B] 3. Lift up the development unit [C],
and pull it out of the machine.
NOTE: Remove the units in the order K, Y, C, M. For example, before removing the M unit, remove the K, Y, and C units first.
4. Peel off the toner cartridge seal [D]. 5. Take out the toner cartridge from
the new development unit. 6. Shake the toner cartridge well, as
shown. NOTE: Hold the center of the
cartridge, at the other side from the toner shutter, and shake it about 10 times.
7. Reinstall the toner cartridge in the development unit.
8. Shake the development unit well. 9. Tilt the unit about 90 degrees, and
shake it about 10 times. 10. Install the development unit to the
machine. NOTE: A white line or band may
appear on one end of the paper if a development is incorrectly installed. To correct this, pull out the development unit partially (about 30 mm) [D] and slowly reinstall it.
B051R103.WMF
B051I407.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 26 July 2002
3-20
3.6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 3.6.1 PCU ASSEMBLY
NOTE: 1) Before replacing any of the parts or consumables in this section, cover the floor with cloth or some sheets of paper.
2) Never tilt the unit. The toner may come out of the unit. 3) When handling the unit, grasp the brown (front) and green (top) grips.
Never touch the OPC (left) or transfer (right) belts. 4) After removing the photoconductor unit, cover it with a light-proof sheet.
Keep it in a dark place.
1. Open the front cover [A]. 2. Open the right cover [B]. 3. Pull the unit out of the machine (! x 3). 4. Grasp the brown and green grips. 5. Lift the unit and remove it.
B051R210.WMF
[A]
[B]
26 July 2002 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
3-21
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLES
1. T/B waste toner bottle [A]
2. O/B waste toner bottle [B] NOTE: There is much more O/B
waste toner than T/B waste toner. Dispose of the O/B waste toner whenever you work on the machine.
Toner Disposal
1) Remove the cap [C]. 2) Dispose of the toner according to
local regulations.
B051R205.WMF
B051R204.WMF
B051R212.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 26 July 2002
3-22
3.6.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT, GRID, WIRE, AND CLEANER
1. Modular cable [A] 2. Charge corona unit [C] (Loosen !
[B], " x 1)
3. Front bracket (! x 1) [D] 4. Grid [E] 5. Rear bracket [F]
6. Front wire cover [G] 7. Rear wire cover [H] 8. Wire cleaner [I] 9. Unhook the corona wire [J].
B051R206.WMF
B051R207.WMF
B051R209.WMF
[E]
[D]
[F]
[G][J]
[H]
[I]
[A]
[C]
[B]
26 July 2002 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
3-23
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.6.4 CHARGE CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR
1. Charge corona unit (☛ 3.6.3) 2. Front cover [A] (! x 3) 3. Motor [B] 3.6.5 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT
1. O/B waste toner bottle (☛ 3.6.2) 2. Photoconductor unit (☛ 3.6.1) 3. Charge corona unit (☛ 3.6.3) 4. Drive gear [A] (! x 1) 5. Rear brace [B] (! x 1) 6. Front brace [C] (! x 1) 7. OPC belt cleaning unit [D] (! x 2)
NOTE: Hold up the photoconductor unit while removing the OPC belt cleaning unit.
3.6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT
1. Photoconductor unit (☛ 3.6.1) 2. Bracket [A] (! x 2) 3. Image transfer belt cleaning unit [B]
B051R208.WMF
B051R915.WMF
B051R919.WMF
[A]
[B]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 26 July 2002
3-24
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT UNIT
1. Open the right lower cover [A]. 2. Right cover [B] (! x 1) 3.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER
1. Brace [A] (! x 1) 2. Guide [B]
NOTE: To remove the screws, turn the roller unit on its pivot.
3. Transfer roller [C] ($ x 2, Bushing x 2, Bearing x 2)
B051R401.WMF
B051R403.WMF
[B]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[A]
26 July 2002 FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3-25
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.8 FUSING/PAPER EXIT
!CAUTION Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
3.8.1 FUSING UNIT
NOTE: 1) After removing the fusing unit, see if oil drips from the exit of the oil pipe.2) Do not turn the main power on with the fusing unit out of the machine if
an oil end condition exists. This will clear the oil end counter, and the machine incorrectly detects oil.
1. Remove the screw [A], and pull out the unit out of the machine.
2. Unhook the bottom stopper [B], and grasp the rear end [C] of the unit.
3. Slide the unit to the end of the base plate [D].
4. Release the unit [E]. 3.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT
1. Fusing unit (☛ 3.8.1) 2. Put the fusing unit on a level place. 3. Remove the cap [A] from the
fusing unit cover, and put it in the oil supply opening [B].
4. Connector cover [C] (! x 1) 5. Oil supply unit [D] (" x 1)
NOTE: Do not touch the oiling felt.
NOTE: When reassembling, install the oil supply unit, remove the cap from the oil supply opening, wipe the cap and the cap holder [E] with waste, and put it on the holder.
B051R506.WMF
B051R501.WMF
[A]
[A]
[D]
[C][B]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
FUSING/PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
3-26
3.8.3 OIL SUPPLY PAD CAUTION: Empty silicone oil out of the oil supply unit into a vessel or container
before beginning the following steps.
1. Oil supply unit [A] (☛ 3.8.2) 2. Springs [B] x 2 3. Cleaning roller assembly [C]
(! x 1, Shoulder screw x 1) 4. Stay [D] (! x 1) 5. Slide the pad [E] and pull it out.
NOTE: If you cannot put the springs in the places, remove the cleaning roller (☛ 3.8.4).
3.8.4 CLEANING ROLLER AND FUSING SPONGE ROLLER
1. Oil supply unit (☛ 3.8.2) 2. Cleaning roller [A] (Bushing x 2, $ x
2) 3. Fusing sponge roller [B] (Bushing x
2, $ x 2, Spring x 2)
B051R503.WMF
B051R504.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
[A]
[B]
26 July 2002 FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3-27
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.8.5 OILING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER
1. Oil supply unit (☛ 3.8.2) 2. Upper cover (☛ 3.8.6) 3. Oil supply roller [A] (Spring x 2, Bushing x 2) 4. Oiling roller [B] (Spring x 2, Bushing x 2)
NOTE: The bushings on the oiling roller [C] are different from those on the oil supply roller [D].
B051R560.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FUSING/PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
3-28
3.8.6 FUSING LAMPS
1. Oil supply unit (☛ 3.8.2) 2. Gear bracket [A] (! x 2) 3. Upper cover [B]
(! x 1, shoulder screw x 1)
4. Pull out the lamp (350W) [C] (! x 2).
5. Pull out the lamp (770W) [D] (! x 2, Cable x 1).
NOTE: “350W” and “770W” are printed on the respective terminals.
B051R510.WMF
B051R954.WMF
B051R950.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
26 July 2002 FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3-29
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.8.7 FUSING INNER UNIT
1. Lamps (☛ 3.8.6) 2. Drive gear [A] 3. Hot roller lamp harness terminal [B]
(! x 1) 4. Fusing inner unit [C] (! x 2, " x 3) 3.8.8 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOFUSE
1. Fusing inner unit (☛ 3.8.7) 2. Pressure roller thermofuse [A] (! x 2)
B051R512.WMF
B051R958.WMF
[C]
[A]
[A]
[B]
FUSING/PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
3-30
3.8.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS
1. Oil supply unit (☛ 3.8.2) 2. Fusing lamps (☛ 3.8.6) 3. Fusing inner unit (☛ 3.8.7) 4. Gear [A]
NOTE: Remove the gear before removing the stripper pawl assembly; otherwise, the gear may be damaged.
5. Hot roller stripper pawl assembly [B] (Spring x 1, ! x 2)
6. Hot roller stripper pawl [C] Reassembling
1. Put the spring [D] on the pawl. 2. Put the left end of the pawl in the square opening [E]. 3. Put the front and rear ends of the pawl in the holder [F]. 4. Confirm that the pawl moves correctly. 3.8.10 FUSING BELT UNIT AND PRESSURE ROLLER UNIT
1. Fusing inner unit (☛ 3.8.7) 2. Springs [A] [B] 3. Separate the fusing belt unit [C] and
the pressure roller unit [D].
B051R502.WMF
B051R513.WMF [A]
[D] [B]
[C]
[A]
[B] [C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
26 July 2002 FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3-31
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.8.11 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER GEAR, AND CLEANING ROLLER
1. Pressure roller unit (☛ 3.8.10) 2. Gear [A] 3. Spring [B] ($ x 1) 4. Hot roller stripper assembly [C] (! x 2) 5. Front bracket [D] (! x 1) 6. Bearing [E] 7. Pressure roller [F] 8. Cleaning roller [G]
B051R505.WMF
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[B]
FUSING/PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
3-32
3.8.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR
1. Pressure roller unit (☛ 3.8.9) 2. Pressure roller lower stay [A] (! x 2) 3. Pressure roller thermistor holder [B] (! x 1) 4. Pressure roller thermistor [C]
B051R514.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
26 July 2002 FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3-33
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.8.13 OIL ABSORBERS
1. Fusing inner unit (☛ 3.8.7) 2. Absorber 1 [A] 3. Pressure roller unit (☛ 3.8.10) 4. Absorber holder [B] (! x 1) 5. Absorber 2 [C] 6. Spring [D] 7. Absorber holder [E] (! x 1) 8. Absorber 3 [F] 9. Spring [G] 10. Base bracket [H] (! x 2) 11. Absorber holder [I] (! x 1) 12. Absorber 4 [J] 13. Absorber 5 [K] 14. Absorber 6 [L]
B051R516.WMF
B051R825.WMF
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F][G]
[H]
[L]
[C]
[B]
[K]
[J]
[I]
FUSING/PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
3-34
3.8.14 PAPER EXIT/OVERFLOW SENSORS
!CAUTION Turn off the main switch and wait until the paper exit unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The paper exit unit can cause serious burns.
1. Open the right cover [A] 2. Upper right cover [B]
3. Open the front cover [C]. 4. Upper front cover [D] (! x 1) 5. Paper exit upper cover [E]
B051R509.WMF
B051R922.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E] [C]
26 July 2002 FUSING/PAPER EXIT
3-35
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
6. Paper exit tray [A] (! x 2) 7. Paper exit lower cover [B] (! x 1)
8. Paper exit unit [C] (" x 3, ! x 1) NOTE: Remove 2 connectors
before removing the unit. To remove the last connector, remove the unit and turn it over. The connector is on the bottom.
9. Paper exit sensor [D] 10. Paper overflow sensor [E]
B051R507.WMF
B051R508.WMF
[E]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT 26 July 2002
3-36
3.9 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT 3.9.1 FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD
1. Paper trays [A]
2. Slide out the shaft [B] (# x 1). 3. Feed roller [C] (1 hook) 4. Friction pad [D] (2 hooks)
B051R601.WMF
B051R952.WMF
[D]
[B] [C]
[A]
26 July 2002 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
3-37
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.9.2 REGISTRATION SENSOR
1. Front cover [A] (L-shaped pin x 2) 2. Remove the upper tray. 3. Rear cover, lower rear cover, and
lower left cover (☛ 3.4.2) 4. Right cover (☛ 3.7.1) 5. Paper exit tray (☛ 3.8.14) 6. Charge corona unit (☛ 3.6.3)
7. Dust shield glass cleaning lever [B] 8. Open the left inner cover door [C]. 9. Left inner cover [D] (! x 2) 10. Right inner cover [E] (! x 3)
NOTE: Pull out the PCU when removing the right inner cover.
B051R602.WMF
B051R603.WMF
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E] [B]
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT 26 July 2002
3-38
11. Rear right cover [A] (! x 6)
12. Bracket [B] (! x 3) 13. Open the controller box [C]
(" x 1, ! x 6)
B051R604.WMF
B051R605.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
26 July 2002 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
3-39
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
14. Handle guard [A] (! x 2) 15. Pull out the handle [B]. 16. Loosen the two screws on the paper
feed clutch bracket (☛ 3.11.6). 17. Vertical transport clutch [C] (" x 1)
18. Transport guide [D] (! x 1)
19. While releasing the wire, remove the transport stay [E] (! x 2). NOTE: You can see the wire clip from
the rear of the machine. 20. Registration sensor [F] (" x 1, ! x 1)
B051R606.WMF
B051R607.WMF
B051R608.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT 26 July 2002
3-40
3.9.3 PAPER FEED SENSOR 1
1. Transport stay (☛ 3.9.2) 2. Paper feed sensor 1 [A] (" x 1)
NOTE: Unhook the rear two pawls first, move the feeler, and unhook the front pawl.
3.9.4 PAPER NEAR-END SENSORS
1. Transport stay (☛ 3.9.2) 2. Feeler [A] 3. Sensor bracket [B] (! x 1) 4. Paper near-end sensor [C] (" x 1
each)
B051R609.WMF
B051R610.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
[A]
26 July 2002 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
3-41
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.9.5 PAPER FEED SENSOR 2
1. Controller box (☛ 3.9.2). 2. Paper trays (☛ 3.9.1) 3. Connector bracket [A] (! x 2) 4. Vertical transport clutch [B] (" x 1) 5. Bushing [C] (# x 1)
6. Roller unit [D] (" x 1, ! x 2)
7. Roller bracket [E] (# x 1, Bushing x 1)
8. Paper feed sensor 2 [F]
B051R612.WMF
B051R613.WMF
B051R614.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[E]
PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT 26 July 2002
3-42
3.9.6 PAPER END SENSOR 1
1. Transport stay (☛ 3.9.2) 2. Lower the feeler [A]. 3. Sensor bracket [B] (! x 1) 4. Paper end sensor 1 [C] (" x 1) 3.9.7 PAPER END SENSOR 2
1. Transport stay (☛ 3.9.2) 2. Lower the feeler [A]. 3. Paper end sensor 2 [B] (" x 1)
B051R611.WMF
B051R615.WMF [B]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
26 July 2002 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3-43
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.10 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 3.10.1 EXHAUST FAN AND I/O BOARD
1. Rear cover (☛ 3.4.2) 2. Bracket [A] (! x 3) 3. Open the controller box [B] (! x 6)
4. Exhaust fan [C] (! x 2) 5. I/O board cover [D] (! x 3) 6. I/O board [E] (" x 29, ! x 4) 3.10.2 EX I/O BOARD
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2) 2. Ex I/O board [A] (" x 14, ! x 4)
B051R605.WMF
B051R801.WMF
B051R802.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[A]
[A]
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 26 July 2002
3-44
3.10.3 BICU BOARD AND CONTROLLER BOARD
1. Rear cover (☛ 3.4.2) 2. Fan [A] (" x 1, ! x 5) 3. Bracket [B] (! x 2) 4. BICU board cover [C] (! x 11) 5. Option component cover [D]
6. BICU board [E] (" x 15, ! x 7) NOTE: 1) Compare the settings of the
dip switches on the old board with the settings on the new board. If they are different, change the settings on the new board to make them identical.
2) When replacing the controller board only; leave the 15 connectors connected, remove the seven screws, and disconnect the BICU board from the controller board.
7. Controller board [F] (! x 6) NOTE: Remove the NVRAM, DIMM,
and optional boards from the old controller board and install them on the new one.
B051R821.WMF
B051R817.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
26 July 2002 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3-45
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.10.4 HDD
1. Optional component cover (☛ 3.10.3) 2. HDD [A] (" x 2, ! x 8) After replacing the hard disk, download the preset stamp data from an IC card. 3.10.5 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD
1. Photoconductor unit (☛ 3.6) 2. Right inner cover (☛ 3.9.2) 3. Photoconductor unit rail [A] (! x 2)
4. High voltage supply board [B] (" x 17, ! x 6) NOTE: When reassembling, check that the
connectors are correctly set.
B051R823.WMF
B051R816.WMF
B051R824.WMF
[A]
[A]
[B]
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 26 July 2002
3-46
3.10.6 POWER SUPPLY UNIT NOTE: When having removed the oil pipe from the oil tank, lift the end of the pipe
and stick it to the right side of the machine with tape. See if oil does not drip from the pipe.
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2). 2. Oil tank [A] 3. Flywheel [B] (! x 3) 4. Duct [C] with bracket [D]
(" x 1, ! x 1) 5. Oil tank holder [E] (! x 2) 6. Bracket [F] (! x 2)
7. Power supply unit [G] (" x 10, ! x 6)
B051R814.WMF
B051R815.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[F]
26 July 2002 DRIVE UNITS
3-47
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.11 DRIVE UNITS 3.11.1 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES
K and Y Development Units
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2). 2. I/O board cover (☛ 3.10.1) 3. Unhook the locks [A] and pull out
the clutches [B] (" x 1). NOTE: When reassembling,
connect the black clutch connector to the DK-CL coupler and the yellow clutch connector to the DY-CL coupler.
C and M Development Units
1. Flywheel [A] (! x 3) 2. Unhook the locks [B] and pull out the
clutches [C] (" x 1). NOTE: When reassembling,
connect the cyan clutch connector to the blue coupler [D].
B051R803.WMF
B051R804.WMF
[A] [B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
DRIVE UNITS 26 July 2002
3-48
3.11.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2). 2. Remove the screws from the EX I/O
board (☛ 3.10.2). NOTE: You need not remove the
connectors. 3. Development motor [A]
(" x 1, ! x 3) 3.11.3 MAIN MOTOR
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2). 2. Flywheel [A] (! x 3) 3. Main motor [B] (" x 1, ! x 3)
B051R805.WMF
B051R806.WMF
[A]
[A]
[B]
26 July 2002 DRIVE UNITS
3-49
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.11.4 PCU GEAR BOX
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2). 2. Main motor (☛ 3.11.3) 3. C and M development unit clutches
(☛ 3.11.1) 4. Tension spring [A] 5. PCU gear box assembly [B] (" x 1, ! x 5)
NOTE: When reassembling, make sure the tension spring [A] is correctly installed. The spring maintains the tension of the timing belt that transfers the drive power to the gear box.
3.11.5 FUSING UNIT MOTOR
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2). 2. Fusing unit motor [A] (" x 1, ! x 3)
B051R807.WMF
B051R808.WMF
[B]
[A]
[A]
DRIVE UNITS 26 July 2002
3-50
3.11.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 1
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2). 2. Handle guard (☛ 3.9.2) 3. Pull out the handle [A]. 4. Connector bracket [B] (! x 2) 5. Paper feed clutch 1 [C]
(" x 1, ! x 2) 3.11.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR
1. Rear cover (☛ 3.4.2) 2. Open the controller box
(☛ 3.9.2). 3. Handle guard (☛ 3.9.2) 4. Pull out the handle [A]. 5. Connector bracket (☛ 3.11.6) 6. Paper feed motor [B] with gears
(" x 1, ! x 5)
NOTE: When reassembling, make sure the vertical transport clutch is in position.
B051R811.WMF
B051R810.WMF
[A][B]
[C]
[A]
[B]
26 July 2002 DRIVE UNITS
3-51
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.11.8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH 2
1. Open the controller box (☛ 3.9.2).
2. Flywheel (! x 3) 3. Duct [A] with bracket [B]
(" x 1, ! x 1) 4. Pull out the lower tray. 5. Loosen the lower-left screw [C] on
the paper feed clutch. 6. Paper feed clutch [D]
(" x 1, ! x 2) 3.11.9 REGISTRATION CLUTCH
1. Loosen the screws on the paper feed clutch 1 (☛ 3.11.6).
2. Unhook the lock [A] and pull the clutch out [B] (" x 1).
B051R812.WMF
B051R809.WMF
[A]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[B]
[C]
DRIVE UNITS 26 July 2002
3-52
3.11.10 OIL PUMP
1. Open the control box (☛ 3.9.2) 2. Pipes [A, B]
NOTE: 1) Keep a piece of waste cloth at hand. Oil may drip from the pipe. 2) When reinstalling the pump, make sure to attach the upper tube
correctly to the oil exit [C]. If not, oil may leak inside the machine. 3. Oil pump bracket [D] (! x 3) 4. Oil pump [E] (! x 2, " x 1)
Install the correct way up. There are two tabs at the top of the pump.
B051R822.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D][E]
26 July 2002 COPY ADJUSTMENT
3-53
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENT 3.12.1 PRINTING
NOTE: 1) Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments.
2) Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP5-955-1, No.11) to print the test pattern for the following procedures.
3) Set SP 5-955-1 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments. Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
1. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-001.
2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-002.
Tray SP mode Specification Any paper tray SP1-001-1 By-pass feed SP1-001-9 Duplex SP1-001-12
3 ± 2 mm
1st paper tray SP1-002-2 2nd paper tray SP1-002-3 3rd paper tray (optional paper tray 1), or LCT SP1-002-4 2 ± 1.5 mm
4th paper tray (optional paper tray 2) SP1-002-5
By-pass feed SP1-002-1 Duplex, side 2 SP1-002-6
A: Leading Edge Registration B: Side-to-side Registration
B
A
B051R558.WMF
COPY ADJUSTMENT 26 July 2002
3-54
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the specifications, adjust the leading/back side edge trim margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and front side edge blank margins, and adjust them using the following SP modes.
SP mode Specification Trailing edge SP2-101-4 3 ± 2 mm Front edge SP2-101-1 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm Leading edge SP2-101-3 3 ± 2 mm Back edge SP2-101-2 2 ± 1.5 mm
A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin B: Right Edge Blank Margin C: Leading Edge Blank Margin D: Left Edge Blank Margin
Main Scan Magnification
1. Print the single-dot grid pattern (SP5-955-1, No.5). 2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-100-1 if
necessary. The specification is ±1%.
D
C
B
A
B051R559.WMF
26 July 2002 COPY ADJUSTMENT
3-55
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.12.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to perform the following adjustments. Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 to adjust if necessary. Standard: ±1.0%.
Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them with the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 0 ± 2 mm.
SP mode Sub-scan SP4-010 Main-scan SP4-011
A
B051R920.WMF
B
A
B051R928.WMF
A: Sub-scan magnification
COPY ADJUSTMENT 26 July 2002
3-56
Main Scan Dot Position Correction
NOTE: Before adjusting the scanner, adjust the printer registration.
1. Enter the Copy SP mode and open SP4-932. 2. Check that each value corresponds to the factory-set value. 3. Touch the COPY Window key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo
mode. NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. This is because color displacement
cannot be checked properly in text mode. 4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do
this.) If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy, exit the SP mode to end the adjustment. If the yellow and cyan lines significantly extend beyond the black line, proceed to the next step.
5. Press the SP Mode to return to the SP mode. Adjust the SP settings until the output is acceptable.
SP4-932-1 Picture element correction red left edge SP4-932-2 Picture element correction red right edge SP4-932-3 Picture element correction blue left edge SP4-932-4 Picture element correction blue right edge
26 July 2002 COPY ADJUSTMENT
3-57
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.12.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
ARDF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration
Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6-006-1 Main Scan Registration ± 10 mm SP6-006-2 Sub-Scan Registration (Simplex) ± 10 mm SP6-006-4 Main Scan Registration (Duplex) ± 10 mm
B
A
B051R928.WMF
B051R921.WMF
A: Sub-registration B: Main registration
COPY ADJUSTMENT 26 July 2002
3-58
ARDF Skew Adjustment
When making a copy using the ADF and the image is skewed, do the following to fix the skewed image. NOTE: Before doing the following step, make sure to confirm whether or not the
copy images made in platen mode and test patterns are not skewed.
1. Peel off the black tape on the right hinge of the ADF. 2. Loosen the screw that secures the left hinge. 3. Change the position of the screw that secures the right hinge to the long hole.
NOTE: Do not tighten the screw at this moment. 4. Move the right hinge position to correct the skewed image. 5. Tighten both screws and check the copy image. 6. If it is not fixed, repeat steps 2 to 5.
B051T500.WMF
26 July 2002 COLOR ADJUSTMENT
3-59
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.13 COLOR ADJUSTMENT 3.13.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC)
The machine automatically calibrates the printer gamma curve. the ACC Test Pattern is printed by the UP mode. The machine scans the test pattern and corrects the printer gamma by comparing the ideal setting with the current image density. The ACC should be performed any time when the customer is not satisfied with the image quality. The previous settings of the ACC can be loaded with SP5-610-6.
COLOR ADJUSTMENT 26 July 2002
3-60
3.13.2 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION NOTE: Normally, the ACC is enough to adjust the color balance to achieve the
optimum print output. The printer gamma correction is only required for fine-tuning to meet user requirements.
The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified using SP modes. The SP value will be applied to the gamma curve created during ACC. The gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and IDmax can be adjusted. The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
Copy Mode KCMY Color Balance Adjustment Adjust only the “Offset” values.
NOTE: Never change the “Option” values (default values are 0).
Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
ID max Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image density.)
Offset The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID, middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are four adjustable modes: • Text (Letter) mode: full colour • Photo mode: full colour • Text (Letter) mode: single color (SC) • Photo mode: single color (SC) SP 4-918 screen: The screen with SC on it is for single colour mode settings. The other two screens are for full colour mode settings.
B502R500.WMF
26 July 2002 COLOR ADJUSTMENT
3-61
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
Adjustment Procedure
1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you are going to adjust. 2. Enter the SP mode. 3. Select “Copy SP”. 4. Enter SP4-918 and select the screen that you are going to adjust. 5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (☛ the
tables below). NOTE: 1) Never change an “Option” value (default value is 0).
2) Adjust the density in order from “ID Max”, “Middle (M)”, “Shadow (S)”, and then “Highlight (H)”.
- Photo Mode, Full Colour - Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
1 ID max: (K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
2 Middle (Middle ID) (K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
3 Shadow (High ID) (K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
4
Highlight (Low ID) (K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that dirty background is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
5
K Highlight (Low ID) (C,M, and Y) <on the full color copy>
Adjust the offset value so that the color balance of black scale levels 3 through 5 in the copy is seen as gray (no C, M, or Y should be visible). If the black scale contains C, M, or Y, redo step 1 to 4.
COLOR ADJUSTMENT 26 July 2002
3-62
- Photo Mode, Single Colour - Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
1 ID max: (K)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
2 Middle (Middle ID) (K)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
3 Shadow (High ID) (K)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
4
Highlight (Low ID) (K)
Adjust the offset value so that dirty background is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
1 ID max: (K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
2 Middle (Middle ID) (K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
3 Shadow (High ID) (K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
4
Highlight (Low ID) (K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that dirty background is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
26 July 2002 COLOR ADJUSTMENT
3-63
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
1 ID max: (K)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
2 Middle (Middle ID) (K)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
3 Shadow (High ID) (K)
Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
4
Highlight (Low ID) (K)
Adjust the offset value so that dirty background is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
NOTE: After adjusting ‘shadow’ as explained above, text parts of the test pattern may not be printed clearly. If this happens, check whether the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of ‘shadow’ again until it is.
COLOR ADJUSTMENT 26 July 2002
3-64
Printer Mode There are five adjustable modes selected by printer SP1-102: • 1800 x 1200 photo mode • 1800 x 600 text mode • 1800 x 600 graph mode • 600 x 600 photo mode • 600 x 600 text mode
K C M Y Highlight Middle Shadow IDmax
SP1-104-1 SP1-104-2 SP1-104-3 SP1-104-4
SP1-104-21 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-24
SP1-104-41 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-44
SP1-104-61 SP1-104-62 SP1-104-63 SP1-104-64
Adjustment Procedure
1. Do ACC for the printer mode. 2. Turn the main power off and on. 3. Enter SP mode. 4. Select “Printer SP”. 5. Select SP1-102 and select the print mode that you are going to adjust. 6. To review the image quality for these settings, choose SP1-103-1 to print out a
tone control test sheet. 7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tone
control test sheet with the C4 test chart. NOTE: Adjust the density in order from “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”, and then
“Highlight”. 8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105.
26 July 2002 COLOR ADJUSTMENT
3-65
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The tables show the level of the color scale on the C4 test chart and on the tone control test sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart. Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance by gamma data adjustment will be required only when the result from ACC and Color Calibration does not meet the customer’s requirements.
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Text - 1 2 5 6 9 12 13 16 - K Test
sheet Photo/Graph - 1 2 5 6 9 11 13 16 -
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Text - 1 2 3 4 7 9 10 12/13 15 C Test
sheet Photo/Graph - 1 2 3 5 8 9 11 12 14
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Text - 1 2 4 5 7 10 12 16 - M Test sheet Photo/Graph - 1 2 5 6 9 11 13 16 -
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Text - 1 3 6 8 10 12/13 16 - - Y Test
sheet Photo/Graph - 1 4 7 8 10 13 16 - -
SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 26 July 2002
3-66
3.14 SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Check the scanner white level after the left scale (with the white reference plate), scanner lamp, 1st or 2nd scanner (carriage), or the lens block assembly is replaced. If the white level is not correct, adjust the level. White Level Check
1. Load the following paper (referred to as “standard paper” in this section) into the paper tray. • Hammermill Copy Plus, 20 lbs. (North America) • Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color, 100 g (Europe)
2. Print out the ACC test pattern (User Tools – Maintenance – ACC). 3. Put the ACC test pattern on the exposure glass. 4. Stack 250 sheets or more of the standard paper on the ACC test pattern. 5. Scan the ACC pattern. 6. Remove the stack of the standard paper and the ACC test pattern from the
exposure glass. 7. Put Color Chart C-4 on the exposure glass. 8. Activate the full color, text/photo mode. 9. Copy Color Chart C-4. 10. Check whether any of the coloured patches in column 2 (in the gradation
pattern area right below the caption “COLOR CHART C-4”) are printed. Also, check that yellow patch 10 does not contain any other colours.
11. If any of the patches in column 2 is printed, or if yellow patch 10 contains other colours, adjust the white level (☛ White Level Adjustment). If not, adjustment is not required.
White Level Adjustment
1. Perform as instructed in “White Level Check”. 2. Activate the SP mode. 3. Select SP5-990-002 and print out the SP mode data list. 4. Select SP4-902-002 (G_DATA1) and read the value. 5. Compare the value with the values in table 1 (when Hammermill Copy Plus is
used) or 2 (when Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color is used). 6. Increase or decrease the values in SP4-685-1, 686-1, and 687-1 if necessary. 7. Check the white level as instructed in “White Level Check”.
NOTE: The machine may have some other trouble when this adjustment causes abnormal outputs or when this adjustment is not effective.
26 July 2002 SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
3-67
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
Table 1: Hammermill Copy Plus, 20 lbs. (North America)
SP4-902-2 (G_DATA1)
SP4-685-001 (Reference
Adjustment: R)
SP4-686-001 (Reference
Adjustment: G)
SP4-687-001 (Reference
Adjustment: B) Necessary adjustment
255 +17 +13 +17 254 +15 +12 +16 253 +14 +11 +15 252 +13 +10 +13 251 +12 +9 +12 250 +10 +8 +11 249 +9 +7 +9 248 +8 +6 +8
Increase the values in SP4-685-1, 686-1, and 687-1.
247 : :
237
±0 ±0 ±0 No adjustment is required.
236 -8 -6 -8 235 -10 -7 -10 234 -11 -8 -11 233 -13 -10 -13 232 -14 -11 -14 231 -15 -12 -16 230 -17 -13 -17 229 -18 -14 -19 228 -20 -15 -20 227 -21 -16 -22 226 -23 -17 -23 225 -24 -19 -25 224 -26 -20 -27 223 -28 -21 -28 222 -29 -22 -30 221 -31 -23 -31 220 -32 -24 -33 219 -34 -26 -35 218 -35 -27 -36 217 -37 -28 -38 216 -39 -29 -40 215 -40 -30 -41
Decrease the values in SP4-685-1, 686-1, and 687-1.
Example 1: When the value in SP4-902-2 is “255”, add 17 to the value in SP4-685-001, 13 to the value in SP4-686-001, and 17 to the value in SP4-687-001.
Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is “247”, do not change any values in SP4-685-001, SP4-686-001, and SP4-687-001.
Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is “236”, subtract 8 from the value in SP4-685-001, 6 from the value in SP4-686-001, and 8 from the value in SP4-687-001.
SCANNER WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 26 July 2002
3-68
Table 2: Ricoh Copy paper for Aficio Color, 100 g (Europe)
SP4-902-2 (G_DATA1)
SP4-685-001 (Reference
Adjustment: R)
SP4-686-001 (Reference
Adjustment: G)
SP4-687-001 (Reference
Adjustment: B) Remarks
255 +23 +18 +23 254 +22 +17 +21 253 +21 +16 +20 252 +20 +15 +19 251 +19 +14 +18 250 +17 +13 +17 249 +16 +12 +15 248 +15 +11 +14 247 +13 +10 +13 246 +12 +9 +12 245 +11 +8 +11 244 +10 +7 +9 243 +8 +6 +8
Increase the values in SP4-685-1, 686-1, and 687-1.
242 : :
232
±0 ±0 ±0 No adjustment is required.
231 -9 -7 -8 230 -10 -8 -10 229 -12 -9 -11 228 -13 -10 -13 227 -15 -11 -14 226 -16 -12 -16 225 -18 -13 -17 224 -19 -14 -19 223 -21 -16 -20 222 -22 -17 -22 221 -24 -18 -23 220 -25 -19 -25 219 -27 -20 -26 218 -29 -22 -28 217 -30 -23 -30 216 -32 -24 -31 215 -34 -25 -33
Decrease the values in SP4-685-1, 686-1, and 687-1.
Example 1: When the value in SP4-902-2 is “255”, add 23 to the value in SP4-685-001, 18 to the value in SP4-686-001, and 23 to the value in SP4-687-001.
Example 2: When the value in SP4-902-2 is “242”, do not change any values in SP4-685-001, SP4-686-001, and SP4-687-001.
Example 3: When the value in SP4-902-2 is “231”, subtract 9 from the value in SP4-685-001, 7 from the value in SP4-686-001, and 8 from the value in SP4-687-001.
26 July 2002 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
3-69
Rep
lace
men
tA
djus
tmen
t
3.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION After clearing the memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen. NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These
items are for design use only.
1. Press ", press #$$%, and then press & 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu.
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press #). 3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark %. 4. Press the lower right mark & after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker (+) appears exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press '). 7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
B051R533.WMF
B051R554.WMF
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-1
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
4. TROUBLESHOOTING 4.1 SERVICE CALL 4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
Level Definition Reset Procedure
A
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation panel. The machine is disabled. The user cannot reset the SC.
Turn the main power switch off then on before entering SP mode. Reset the SC (set SP5-810 to 1), then turn the main switch off then on again.
B
SCs to disable only the features that use the defective item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
C SCs that are not shown on the operation panel. They are internally logged.
Logging only
D
The SC is displayed on the operation panel. Turning the operation switch or main power switch off then on resets the SC. The SC is redisplayed if it occurs after the main power switch is turned on again.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
NOTE: 1) All SCs are logged. 2) When an electrical circuit board has a problem, check the connections
before replacing the PCBs. 3) When a motor has a problem, check the mechanical load before
replacing the motor or sensor.
SERVICE CALL 26 July 2002
4-2
4.1.2 SC TABLE No.
Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Exposure lamp error 101 D The standard white level is not properly detected when scanning the shading plate. (The shading data peak does not reach the specified threshold.)
• Exposure lamp defective • Lamp stabilizer defective • Exposure lamp connector defective • Standard white plate dirty • Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of
position or dirty • SBU defective
Scanner home position error 1 120 D The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition during scanning.
• Scanner I/O board or SBU defective • Scanner motor defective • Harness between scanner I/O board
and scanner motor disconnected • Scanner HP sensor defective • Harness between SBU and HP sensor
disconnected • Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective Scanner home position error 2 121 D The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition during scanning.
• Scanner I/O board or SBU defective • Scanner motor defective • Harness between scanner I/O board
and scanner motor disconnected • Scanner HP sensor defective • Harness between SBU and HP sensor
disconnected • Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective Scanner home position error 3 122 D The scanner home position sensor does not detect the home position during initialization.
• Scanner I/O board or SBU defective • Scanner motor defective • Harness between scanner I/O board
and scanner motor disconnected • Scanner HP sensor defective • Harness between SBU and HP sensor
disconnected • Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
carriage defective White level detection error 142 D The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control.
• Dirty exposure glass or optics section • SBU board defective • BICU board defective • Exposure lamp defective • Lamp stabilizer defective
BICU error 161 D • The correct value is not input into
ASIC1 on the BICU board when the main switch is turned on.
• ASICs on the BICU board are not recognized during scanning operation.
• BICU board defective (defective connection between ASICs)
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-3
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Serial number mismatch 195 D Serial number stored in the memory is not correct. NOTE: Check the serial number with
SP5-811-002. If the stored serial number is incorrect, contact your product specialist for details of how to solve the problem.
• NVRAM defective • BICU replaced without original NVRAM
Polygon motor error 201 D • The polygon motor starts operating.
→ The lock signal is not detected within 20 seconds.
• The polygon motor starts operating. → The lock signal is detected within 20 seconds. → After a 3-second waiting time, no lock signal is detected within 20 seconds.
• The polygon motor stops operating. → The lock signal is not detected within 20 seconds.
• The polygon motor is operating. → The lock signal remains undetected for 0.5 seconds.
• Defective polygon motor • Defective harness
1st beam synchronization error 220 D A polygon motor lock is detected; the LD door is closed; and the LD remains on. → The LD error (1st beam synchronization error) continues for 0.5 seconds.
• Disconnected synchronization detector board
• Defective LD unit • Defective BICU
2nd beam synchronization error 221 D A polygon motor lock is detected; the LD door is closed; and the LD remains on. → The LD error (2nd beam synchronization error) continues for 0.5 seconds.
• Disconnected synchronization detector board
• Defective LD unit • Defective BICU
FGATE on error 230 D A transfer belt mark is detected. → No FGATE on signal is detected within 1 second.
• Defective BICU
FGATE off error 231 D An FGATE assert signal is detected. → The FGATE negate signal is not detected within 30 seconds.
• Defective BICU
LD error 241 D An LD error continues for 0.5 seconds. (After an LD error is detected, an LD error release is written to the GAVD chip during monitoring.)
• Defective LD unit
SERVICE CALL 26 July 2002
4-4
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Image transfer belt mark detection error 280 D • An imaging process starts. → No
belt mark is detected within 1 revolution.
• A color imaging process starts. → A mono color image is transferred. → FGATE becomes active. → No belt mark is detected within 1 revolution.
• Thick paper or OHP film is used. → The belt slows down. → No belt mark is detected within 1 revolution.
• Defective BICU • Poor electrical connection between
sensor and BICU
GAVD communication error 282 D Data is transferred. → The CPU does not detect the communication signal from GAVD.
• Defective BICU
Charge corona unit electrical leak 300 D The supply to the charge corona unit is continuously output, and the unit is operating at the minimum PWM duty value. → 4.5 Volts (or more) returns for 60 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the charge corona unit • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
Charge corona unit disconnection 301 D The supply to the charge corona unit is continuously output. → The unit operates at the maximum PWM duty value for 60 milliseconds.
• Defective PCU installation (OPC belt) • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board) Charge grid electrical leak 302 D The supply to the charge grid is continuously output. → The returning voltage exceeds the target by 0.5 Volt or more for 120 milliseconds.
• Defective PCU installation (OPC belt) • Short circuit in the charge grid • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board) Charge corona unit cleaner error 305 D • Cleaning starts. → The lock signal
is not detected within 30 seconds. • Cleaning starts. → The cleaner
starts to turn. → The lock signal is detected within 6 seconds.
• The lock signal is detected while the unit is moving away from the home position. → The next lock signal is detected within 6 seconds after the unit has turned toward the home position.
• Defective PCU installation (OPC belt) • Defective cleaner • Incorrect charge corona unit installation • Toner fallen into the cleaner drive
mechanism
Development error 1 (K/Y) 350 D A development process starts. → The returning voltage exceeds the target by 0.5 Volt or more for 60 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the development unit • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-5
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Development error 2 (C/M) 351 D A development process starts. → The returning voltage exceeds the target by 0.5 Volt or more for 60 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the development unit • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board) Development motor error 352 D • The development motor starts or
changes speed. → The motor does not detect a 1-second lock signal within 3 seconds.
• The development motor starts. → The lock signal is detected during normal operation. → The lock signal is interrupted for 1 second or more.
• Defective development motor
1st transfer (image transfer) electric leakage (+) 400 D Image transfer starts. → The process operates at the minimum PWM duty value. The returned current exceeds 1.8 V for 180 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the image transfer unit • Defective image transfer belt • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board) 1st transfer (image transfer) electric leakage (–) 401 D Image transfer starts. → The negative (–) output is at the maximum PWM duty value for 60 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the image transfer belt • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board) 2nd transfer (paper transfer) electric leakage (+) 410 D Paper transfer starts. → The positive (+) output is at the minimum PWM duty value. → The returning voltage stays at 2.7 V or more for 60 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the paper transfer unit • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
2nd transfer (paper transfer) electric leakage (–) 411 D Paper transfer starts. → The negative (–) output is at the minimum PWM duty value. → The returning voltage stays at 4.5 V or more for 60 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the paper transfer unit • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
2nd transfer (paper transfer) disconnection (+) 412 D Paper transfer starts. → The positive (+) output is at the maximum PWM duty value for 60 milliseconds.
• Right cover not closed • Defective transfer roller contact
mechanism • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board) Discharge error (fusing bias) 420 D The discharge circuit is operating at the maximum PWM duty value for 60 milliseconds.
• Fusing bias short circuit • Scratched fusing belt • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board)
SERVICE CALL 26 July 2002
4-6
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Discharge plate error 421 During discharging, the leakage detection signal is low for 60 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the discharge plate • Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board) Transfer belt cleaning error 430 D • Cleaning is operating at the
maximum PWM duty value for 60 milliseconds.
• Short circuit in the transfer belt cleaning unit
• Defective high voltage supply board • Defective harness (BICU - high voltage
supply board) Main motor error 440 D • The main motor starts or changes
speed. → The lock signal does not continue for 1 second within 3 seconds.
• The main motor starts. → The lock signal is detected and operation proceeds normally. → The lock signal is interrupted for 1 second.
• Defective main motor • Too much load of the main motor drive
Temperature sensor error 460 D The output is 4.5 V (or higher) or 0.3 V (or lower) for 12 seconds.
• Defective temp./ humidity sensor • Defective circuit • Defective connector
Humidity sensor error 461 D The output is 4.5 V (or higher) or 0.3 V (or lower) for 12 seconds.
• Defective temp./ humidity sensor • Defective circuit • Defective connector
ID sensor error 480 D The ID sensor is being calibrated (process control, step 1) → While the LED is off, the output voltage is 0.5 V or lower.
• Defective ID sensor • Defective connector
Transfer belt mark detection error 481 D • The main motor is operating; and
the lock signal is detected. → The belt mark sensor signal does not change for 120 milliseconds.
• Defective main motor • Image transfer belt out of position • Belt mark blurred or absent
3rd tray error 503 B • The tray lift motor turns on. → The
top of the paper stack is not detected for 18 seconds.
• The tray is set. → The top of the paper stack is detected. → The bottom plate is lowered. → The stack detection is not cleared within 7 seconds. → These steps are repeated 4 times.
• Defective paper height sensor • Defective tray lift motor
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-7
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
4th tray error 504 B • The tray lift motor turns on. → The
top of the paper stack is not detected for 18 seconds.
• The tray is set. → The top of the paper stack is detected. → The bottom plate is lowered. → The stack detection is not cleared within 7 seconds. → These steps are repeated 4 times.
• Defective paper height sensor • Defective tray lift motor
Duplex unit communication error 515 D • A connection error occurs. • The signal is sent from the copier to
the duplex unit every 3 seconds while paper is not transported by the unit. However, the duplex unit does not respond within 5 seconds.
• Defective duplex unit board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Defective connection (Main unit -
Duplex unit)
Fusing unit motor 520 D • The motor starts or changes speed.
→ The lock signal does not continue for 1 second within a 3-second interval.
• The motor starts. → The lock signal is detected and operation proceeds normally. → The lock signal is interrupted for 1 second.
• Defective fusing unit motor
Paper feed motor error 521 D • The motor starts or changes speed.
→ The lock signal does not continue for 1 second within a 3-second interval.
• The motor starts. → The lock signal is detected and operation proceeds normally. → The lock signal is interrupted for 1 second.
• Defective paper feed motor
Thermistor disconnection (heating roller) 541 A The fusing unit starts warm up to the print ready temperature. → The temperature does not reach 7°C for 10 seconds.
• Defective thermistor • Thermistor loose connection • Defective connector
Fusing warm-up timeout (heating roller) 542 A The main switch is turned on or a cover is closed. → The heating roller does not reach the warm-up temperature within 50 seconds.
• Defective lamp (loose connection, thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
• Incorrect detection (loose thermistor connection, fusing - drawer loose connection)
Overheat error (heating roller) 543 A The heating roller thermistor detects 220°C for 5 seconds.
• Short circuit • Defective BICU board • Defective PSU
SERVICE CALL 26 July 2002
4-8
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Low temperature error (heating roller) 544 A During standby or operation, the heating roller thermistor detects 100 °C or less for 5 seconds.
• Defective lamp (loose connection, thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
• Incorrect detection (loose thermistor connection, fusing - drawer loose connection)
Full power error (heating roller) 545 A Fusing unit warm-up is complete. → The heating roller stops turning. → The heating roller lamp keeps outputting the maximum power for 30 seconds.
• Thermistor loose connection • Fusing - drawer loose connection
Unstable temperature (heating roller) 546 A The heating roller thermistor detects unstable temperature increases or decreases within 60 seconds.
• Thermistor loose connection • Fusing - drawer loose connection
Thermistor disconnection (pressure roller) 551 A The pressure roller thermistor detects 7°C or lower for 30 seconds.
• Thermistor loose connection • Defective harness • Defective connector
Warm-up time over (pressure roller) 552 A The main switch is turned on or a cover is closed. → The fusing pressure roller does not reach the ready temperature within 200 seconds.
• Defective lamp (loose connection, thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
• Incorrect detection (thermistor loose connection, fusing - drawer loose connection)
Overheat error (pressure roller) 553 A The pressure roller thermistor detects 165°C for 5 seconds.
• Loose connection • Defective BICU board • Defective PSU
Low temperature error (pressure roller) 554 A During standby or operation, the pressure roller thermistor detects 60°C or less for 5 seconds.
• Defective lamp (loose connection, thermostat failure, PSU, thermostat)
• Incorrect detection (thermistor loose connection, fusing - drawer loose connection)
Full power error (pressure roller) 555 A Fusing unit warm-up is complete.→ The fusing pressure roller stops turning. → The pressure roller lamp keeps outputting the maximum power for 200 seconds.
• Thermistor loose connection • Fusing - drawer loose connection
Unstable temperature (pressure roller) 556 A The pressure roller thermistor detects unstable temperature increases or decreases within 60 seconds.
• Thermistor loose connection • Fusing - drawer loose connection
Zero cross error 560 D The main switch is turned on; the fusing relay turns on. → 50 Hz or 60 Hz is not detected within 5 seconds.
• Defective PSU • Incorrect power supply
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-9
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Fusing oil end 570 A 500 sheets of paper have been output since oil end was detected.
• Insufficient oil (the oil tank in the rear of the machine)
• Defective oil pipe • Defective oil pump • Defective oil end sensor
Fusing oil overflow 571 A • The oil overflow sensor detects oil. • When the machine covers are
closed, the oil supply unit is not detected.
• When the machine covers are closed, the fusing unit is not detected.
• Defective oil end sensor • Defective oil overflow sensor • Defective sensor cable • Oil supply unit not installed
ADF communication error 620 D The ADF has been detected. → A communication error has occurred.
• Loose connection • Defective ADF • Defective BICU board • Defective scanner I/O board • External noise
CSS communication error 630 C The machine tries to communicate with one of the terminals of a relevant service center. → An error signal returns.
• Communication error on the public telephone network (logged only; the machine can still operate)
MF accounting device error 1 632 D The machine sends a data frame. → No normal end signal returns. → This symptom happens three times.
• Defective or broken line between machine and device
MF accounting device error 2 633 D The machine is communicating with the accounting device. → The break signal returns.
• Defective or broken line between machine and device
MF accounting device error 3 634 D A backup RAM error is reported from the accounting device.
• Defective accounting device controller • Defective battery in the accounting
device MF accounting device error 4 635 D A battery voltage error is reported from the accounting device.
• Defective accounting device controller • Defective battery in the accounting
device Engine-to-controller communication checksum error 640 C While the BICU and controller are communicating, a checksum error has occurred.
• Logged only; the machine can still operate
Engine-to-controller response error 641 D The controller has sent a frame with the RAPI protocol, but the engine does not respond.
• Defective controller board • External noise
SERVICE CALL 26 July 2002
4-10
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Engine startup error 670 D Just after the main power is turned on or the machine is recovering from auto off mode, the engine ready signal assertion fails. Just after the main power is turned on, the engine does not respond.
• Defective controller board
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup 672 D After powering on the machine, communication between the controller and operation panel does not begin, or the communication is interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller stalled • Controller board installed incorrectly • Defective controller board • Operation panel connector loose or
defective • Poor connection of DIMM and optional
boards on the controller board SBU/IPU communication error 685 D While data is sent between the scanner and BICU board, a communication error has occurred.
• Defective scanner unit cable • Defective SBU board • Defective BICU board
PER command error 687 D Some image data is transferred. → The controller does not report the necessary memory address.
• Poor connection between BICU and controller
• Defective BICU • Defective controller
Finisher jogger motor error (500-sheet finisher) 720 B • The finisher jogger H.P sensor
remains de-activated for a certain time when returning to home position.
• The finisher jogger H.P sensor remains activated for a certain time when moving away from home position.
• Jogger HP sensor defective • Jogger motor defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
Finisher jogger motor error (1000-sheet finisher) 722 B The finisher jogger H.P sensor remains de-activated for a certain time when returning to home position. The finisher jogger H.P sensor remains activated for a certain time when moving away from home position.
• Jogger HP sensor defective • Jogger motor defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
Finisher staple hammer motor error (1000-sheet finisher) 724 B Stapling does not finish within 600 ms after the staple hammer motor turned on.
• Staple jam • Stapler overload caused by trying to
staple too many sheets • Staple hammer motor defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-11
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Finisher stack feed-out motor error (1000-sheet finisher) 725 B The stack feed-out belt H.P sensor does not activate within a certain time after the stack feed-out motor turned on.
• Stack feed-out HP sensor defective • Stack feed-out motor defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
Finisher tray lift motor error (1000-sheet finisher) 726 B The stack height sensor does not activate within a certain time after the tray lift motor turned on.
• Tray lift motor defective • Stack height sensor defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
Finisher stapler motor error (500-sheet finisher) 727 B Stapling does not finish within a certain time after the stapler motor turned on.
• Staple jam • Stapler overload caused by trying to
staple too many sheets • Stapler motor defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
Finisher paper stack height error (500-sheet finisher) 728 B The stack height detection lever does not return to its home position before going to detect the stack height.
• Stack height lever solenoid defective • Stack height sensor defective • Lever sensor defective • Main control board defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective IOB • Incorrect installation
Finisher stapler motor error (1000-sheet finisher) 730 B The stapler does not return to its home position within a certain time after the stapler motor turned on. The stapler H.P sensor does not activate within a certain time after the stapler motor turned on.
• Stapler motor defective • Stapler HP sensor defective • Poor stapler motor connection • Defective finisher control board • Defective board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
SERVICE CALL 26 July 2002
4-12
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
• Output tray motor error (500-sheet finisher) • Exit guide plate motor error (1000-sheet finisher)
731 B
The tray upper limit sensor does not activate within a certain time after the tray motor turned on (500-sheet finisher). The exit guide plate HP sensor does not activate within a certain time after the exit guide plate motor turned on (1000-sheet finisher).
• Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
500-sheet finisher • Output tray motor defective • Tray upper limit sensor defective
1000-sheet finisher • Exit guide plate motor defective • Exit guide plate HP sensor defective
Finisher shift motor error (1000-sheet finisher) 732 B Roller shift does not finish within a certain time after the shift motor turned on.
• Shift motor defective • Shift HP sensor defective • Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
Finisher communication error 740 D • A connection error occurs. • The UART reports a
communication error. • In cases other than paper transport,
after an every-3-second command is sent, the finisher does not respond within 5 seconds.
• Defective finisher control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Incorrect installation
1st paper tray unit communication error 750 D • A connection error occurs. • The UART reports a
communication error. • In cases other than paper transport,
after an every-3-second command is sent, the paper tray unit does not respond within 5 seconds.
• Defective paper tray unit control board • Defective BICU • Defective Ex-IOB • Defective connection (Paper tray - main
unit)
Shift tray unit motor error 770 D • The machine starts. → The tray
motor operates for 2.2 seconds. → The sensor does not detect the operation.
• The machine is printing. → The tray motor operates for 2.2 seconds. → The sensor does not detect the operation.
• Defective tray motor • Defective sensor • Defective shift tray connector
Bridge unit error 791 D The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge unit.
• Defective connector • Defective cable
Finisher error 792 D The machine does not recognize the finisher, but recognizes the relay unit.
• Defective connector • Defective cable • Incorrect installation
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-13
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Interchange unit error 793 D The machine recognizes the duplex unit/1-bin tray unit, but does not recognize the interchange unit.
• Incorrect installation • Defective connector • Defective cable
Startup without video output end error (K) 800 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the engine within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video output end error (Y) 801 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the engine within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video output end error (M) 802 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the engine within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video output end error (C) 803 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the engine within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video input end error (K) 804 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the scanner within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video input end error (Y) 805 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the scanner within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video input end error (M) 806 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the scanner within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video input end error (C) 807 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the scanner within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video input end error (R) 808 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the scanner within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Startup without video input end error (G) 809 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the engine within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
SERVICE CALL 26 July 2002
4-14
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Startup without video input end error (B) 810 B Video transfer to the engine is started, but a video transmission end command is not issued by the engine within the specified time.
• Defective controller board
Watchdog error 818 B While the system program is running, no other programs can run (due to a bus hold or endless loop).
• Defective controller board
Kernel abnormal end error 819 B A HDD error or a software error has occurred, terminating the SCS process, gwinit process, and finally the kernel program. A system process has exhausted the RAM.
• HDD error • Software application error • RAM shortage
Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU 820 B An unexpected exception or interruption has occurred.
• Defective controller board • Software defective
Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC 821 B The ASIC returned an error during the self-diagnostic test, because the ASIC and CPU timer interrupts are compared and determined to be out of range.
• Defective controller board
Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD 822 B The hard disk drive returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
• HDD defective • HDD connector defective • Defective controller board
Self-diagnostic Error: NIB 823 B The network interface board returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
• Network interface board defective • Defective controller board
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM 824 B The resident non-volatile RAM returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
• NVRAM damaged or abnormal • Backup battery has discharged • NVRAM socket damaged
Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM 826 B The RTC (real time clock) or optional NVRAM returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
• RTC defective • NVRAM defective
Self-diagnostic Error: RAM 827 B The resident RAM returned a verify error during the self-diagnostic test.
• Memory malfunction
Self-diagnostic Error: ROM 828 B The resident read-only memory returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
• Defective controller board • Firmware defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM 829 B The optional RAM returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
• RAM DIMM defective • Defective controller board
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-15
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Self-Diagnostic Error: Parallel Interface 835 B A loopback test error occurred. • Loopback connector not detected
• IEEE1284 connector defective • Defective controller board
Self-diagnostic Error: Resident Font ROM 836 B The resident font ROM returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
• Font ROM defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional Font ROM 837 B The optional font ROM returned an error during the self-diagnostic test.
• Font ROM defective
Verification error 838 D The verification data of the clock generator is read via the communication bus. → The data contradicts the normal value.
• Defective controller board
Network I/F abnormal 850 B The IP address is incorrect, or the controller cannot accesses the network due to a driver error.
• Incorrect network setting • Defective controller board
IEEE1394 I/F abnormal 851 B The IEEE1394 interface cannot be used, due to a driver error.
• IEEE1394 interface board defective • Defective controller board
IEEE802 11b card startup error 853 D The machine starts up. → The IEEE802 11b card connection board is recognized. → The IEEE802 11b card is not recognized.
• Loose connection between the card and the connection board
IEEE802 11b card access error 854 D The machine has been reading the data from the card. → The machine loses access to the card; the IEEE802 11b card connection board is still recognized.
• Loose connection between the card and the connection board
IEEE802 11b card error 855 D Some illegal data is found in the card. • Defective card IEEE802 11b card connection board error 856 D An error is detected in the IEEE802 11b card connection board.
• Defective card connection board
Startup without HD connection at main power on 860 C The hard disk is not detected. (The hard disk is not formatted.)
• Cable between controller and HD loose or defective
• HD power connector loose or defective • HD defective • Controller defective
Startup without HD detection when the power key was pressed 861 C The hard disk is not detected. • Cable between controller and HD loose
or defective • HD power connector loose or defective • HD defective • Controller defective
SERVICE CALL 26 July 2002
4-16
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Bad sector count at the maximum 862 D The hard disk has 100 bad sectors in the image storage area. → More data is read from the hard disk. → SC863 occurs. → The number of bad sectors exceeds the maximum value. NOTE: To format the hard disk, use
SP5-832-1. Bad sectors may affect quality or reduce productivity. The hard disk should be replaced when it contains bad sectors.
• Data corruption • Defective hard disk
Startup without HD data lead 863 B Data stored on the hard disk is not read correctly.
• Bad sector detected during operation of the HD
HD data CRC error 864 B • During operation of the HD, the HD
responded with a CRC error. • Data transfer from the HD was
abnormal. HD access error 865 B The hard disk returned an error. • Error detected other that a bad sector
error (SC863) or a CRC error (SC864) Address book data error 870 D The address book in the hard disk is accessed. → An error is detected in the address book data; address book data is not read; or data is not written into the address book. NOTE: To recover from the error, do
any of the following countermeasures:
• Format the address book by using SP5-832-008 (all data in the address book–including the user codes and counters–is initialized)
• Initialize the user data by using SP5-832-006 and -007 (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on)
Replace the hard disk (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on).
• Data corruption • Defective hard disk • Defective software
Electronic total counter error 900 B The value of the total counter is out of the normal range.
• Defective NVRAM
Mechanical total counter error 1 901 B Mechanical counter 1 is not initialized, or not detected.
• Defective connection • Defective counter
Mechanical total counter error 2 902 B Mechanical counter 2 is not initialized, or not detected.
• Defective connection • Defective counter
26 July 2002 SERVICE CALL
4-17
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause
Net file error 925 D The management file for net files is corrupted; net files are not normally read. Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
• Defective hardware • Data corruption • Defective software
Software performance error 990 B The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation. NOTE: When this error occurs, the
file name, address, and data will be stored in NVRAM. This information can be checked by using SP7-403. See the data and the situation in which this SC occurs. Then report the data and conditions to your technical control center.
• Software defective • Internal parameter incorrect • Insufficient working memory
Software continuity error 991 C The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation. However, unlike SC990, the process can keep on running.
• Logged only; the machine can continue to operate
Other system SCs 992 D The controller received an unknown SC code from the engine.
• Contact your product specialist.
Application function selection error 997 B The application selected by a key press on the operation panel does not start or ends abnormally.
• Software defective • An option required by the application
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed. Application start error 998 B • After switching the machine on, the
application does not start within 60 s. (No applications start or end normally.)
• Software defective • An option required by the application
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed.
Program download error 999 B The download (program, print data, language data) from the IC card does not execute normally. Important Notes About SC999 • This SC is not logged, because it
operates primarily in the download mode.
• If the machine loses power while downloading, or if for some other reason the download does not end normally, this could damage the controller board or the PCB targeted for the download and prevent subsequent downloading. If this problem occurs, the damaged PCB must be replaced.
• Software defective • An option required by the application
(RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed • Board installed incorrectly • BICU defective • Controller defective • IC card defective • NVRAM defective • Loss of power during downloading
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 26 July 2002
4-18
4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 4.2.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller. • Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics
just after the power has been turned on. • Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350) • SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
Power ON
Diagnostic RAM Check
CPU Check
ASIC Check
Standard RAMConection Check
Optional RAMConnection Check
Clock Generator Check
Standard NVRAMCheck
Font Header Check
Optional NVRAM Check
Real Time Clock Check
Network Check
Engine I/F Check
Interrupt Check
Memory Chip Check
Power-on orDetailed
ROM Sum Check
Standard RAM DetailedCheck
Optional RAM DetailedCheck
Standard NVRAMDetailed Check
Optional NVRAMDetailed Check
Optinoal HDD Check
IEEE1284 Loop-backCheck
Real Time ClockDetailed Check
Font ROM Sum Check
END
Power-on
Detailed
NG SC821
NG SC820
NG SC838
NG SC826
NG SC828
NG SC829
NG SC826
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
A
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
A
NG Not initialized
NG SC829
NG SC827
NG SC824
NGNot use optional RAM
Error Logged
NG
Error Logged
B051T516.WMF
26 July 2002 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
4-19
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
This detailed self-diagnostic test requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350).
1. Turn off the machine and attach the loop-back connector to the parallel interface.
2. Hold down !, press and hold down ", and then while pressing both keys at the same time, switch on the machine. You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel, and prints the diagnostic report after completing the test. • Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected
during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result). • Refer to section 4.2 for details about the error codes.
IMAGE TEST MODE 26 July 2002
4-20
4.3 IMAGE TEST MODE 4.3.1 OVERVIEW
The SBU, BICU, and LD board have the function that prints out their test pattern. It is useful to find the defective board when the image data problem is occurred. 4.3.2 VPU TEST
The SBU has the VPU test pattern. To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907.
SP4-907-1: VPU Test Pattern: R SP4-907-2: VPU Test Pattern: G SP4-907-3: VPU Test Pattern: B 4.3.3 IPU TEST
The BICU board has the IPU test pattern. To make sure the image processing is functioning, output the IPU test pattern with SP4-417. The BICU board also has the self-check mode with SP4-904-1 or 2. If no error is detected, the test ends, and the completion code appears in the operation panel display. If an error is detected, the test is interrupted and an error code is displayed. The table below lists the completion and error codes.
SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result Code
Normal end 00 Abnormal end 11 ~ 15
SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result Code
Normal end 00 Abnormal end 21 ~ 24
4.3.4 GAVD TEST
The LD board has the GAVD test pattern. To make sure the printing control is functioning, output the GAVD test pattern with SP5-955 (Test Pattern is displayed). This test pattern includes the pattern for image adjustment such as registration, blank margin, laser beam pitch, etc.
26 July 2002 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4-21
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 4.4.1 SENSORS
Component (Symbol) CN Condition Symptom
Open A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and the paper jam is cleared when the paper is removed
Fusing exit sensor 324
(I/O board) Shorted A paper jam is detected when paper is not fed. Open No immediate symptom is seen. (☛ NOTE) ID sensor 258
(BICU) Shorted • The machine does not respond. • No immediate symptom is seen. (☛ NOTE)
Open SC481 is displayed. Image transfer belt mark sensor
307 (I/O board) Shorted SC481 is displayed.
Open Bottle full is not detected when the bottle is full. O/B waste toner bottle full sensor
307 (I/O board) Shorted No symptom is seen.
Open No immediate symptom is seen. Oil end sensor 259 (BICU) Shorted The oil pump turns on to pump oil up when there
is enough oil. Open SC571 is displayed. Oil overflow
sensor 259
(BICU) Shorted SC571 is displayed.
Open The original size is not correctly detected. Output images are blurred.
Original length sensor 1 104
(SBU) Shorted The original size is not correctly detected. Output images are blurred.
Open The original size is not correctly detected. Output images are blurred.
Original length sensor 2 104
(SBU) Shorted The original size is not correctly detected. Output images are blurred.
Open The original size is not correctly detected. Output images are blurred.
Original width sensor 104
(SBU) Shorted The original size is not correctly detected. Output images are blurred.
Open Paper end is not detected when the tray is empty.
Paper end sensor 1 406 (High
voltage supply) Shorted Paper end is detected when the tray is not
empty.
Open Paper end is not detected when the tray is empty.
Paper end sensor 2 340
(I/O board) Shorted Paper end is detected when the tray is not empty.
Open A paper jam is detected when paper is fed. Paper exit sensor
324 (I/O board) Shorted A paper jam is detected when no paper is fed.
Open A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is removed.
Paper feed sensor 1
324 (I/O board)
Shorted
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before paper is fed.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 26 July 2002
4-22
Component (Symbol) CN Condition Symptom
Open A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is removed.
Paper feed sensor 2
340 (I/O board)
Shorted
A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is removed. Or, a paper jam is detected before paper is fed.
Open Paper near end is detected when the tray is full. Paper near-end sensor 1
406 (High voltage
supply) Shorted Paper full is detected when the tray is almost emptily.
Open Paper end is detected when the tray is not empty.
Paper near-end sensor 2 406
(High voltage supply) Shorted
• Paper full is detected when the tray is almost empty.
• Paper near-end is detected when the tray is full.
Open Paper overflow is not detected when the paper exit tray is full.
Paper overflow sensor 324
(I/O board) Shorted Paper overflow is detected when the paper exit tray is not full.
Open The original size is not correctly detected. Platen cover sensor
324 (I/O board) Shorted No symptom
Open A paper jam is detected when paper is fed; and the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is removed.
Registration sensor
405 (High voltage
supply) Shorted • A paper jam is detected when paper is fed;
and the paper jam is not cleared when the paper is removed.
• A paper jam is detected before paper is fed. Open SC120 is displayed. Scanner HP
sensor 104 (SBU) Shorted The scanner motor tries to operate for about 40
seconds before SC122 is displayed. Open SC220 is displayed. Synchronization
detector 502 (LDB) Shorted The machine does not respond.
SC220 is displayed. Open Bottle full is not detected when the bottle is full. T/B waste toner
bottle full sensor
307 (I/O board) Shorted Bottle full is detected when the bottle is not full.
Open SC460 is displayed. Temperature/humidity sensor
257 (BICU) Shorted SC460 is displayed.
NOTE: An SC condition occurs only when a new PCU is being installed in the machine. During copying, if the ID sensor fails, the image density will be changed.
26 July 2002 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4-23
Trou
ble-
shoo
ting
4.4.2 SWITCHES Component
(Symbol) CN Condition Symptom
Open The user is prompted to close the exit cover. Exit cover switch
324 (I/O board) Shorted No symptom is seen.
Open The user is prompted to close the front cover. Front cover switch
324 (I/O board) Shorted No symptom is seen.
Open The user is prompted to close the front cover. Interlock switch 312 (I/O board) Shorted No symptom is seen.
Open The bottle is not detected when it is installed. O/B waste toner bottle switch
307 (I/O board) Shorted The bottle is detected when it is not installed.
Open The tray is not detected when it is installed. Tray set/paper size switch (tray 1) 308
(I/O board) Shorted • The paper tray is detected when it is not
installed. • The paper size is incorrectly detected (a paper
jam may occur). Open The tray is not detected when it is installed. Tray set/paper
size switch (tray 2) 308
(I/O board) Shorted • The paper tray is detected when it is not
installed. • The paper size is incorrectly detected (a paper
jam may occur). Open The user is prompted to close the right cover. Right cover
switch 324
(I/O board) Shorted No symptom Open The bottle is not detected when it is installed. T/B waste toner
bottle switch 307 (I/O board) Shorted Bottle full is detected when the bottle is not
installed.
4.4.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Rating Fuse 115V 220 ~ 240V
Symptom when turning on the main switch
Power Supply Board FU1 (N.A.) 15A/125V — No response
FU2 10A/250V 5A/250V No response
FU8 4A/125V 4A/250V The machine starts initialization (the sound is heard), but nothing appears on the operation panel.
FU9 6.3A/250V 6.3A/250V The machine starts program loading, and "Functional Problems" appears on the operation panel with the code "SC901."
CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS 26 July 2002
4-24
4.5 CHECK POINTS FOR IMAGE PROBLEMS AT REGULAR INTERVALS
Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain components. The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals).
Colored spots at 54-mm intervals: Development roller Abnormal image at 68-mm intervals: Transfer roller Abnormal image at 188-mm intervals: Fusing belt Abnormal image at 125-mm intervals: Pressure roller in the fusing unit
Problems at regular intervals
Paper feed
B051T801.WMF
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-1
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5. SERVICE TABLES 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
!CAUTION Do not turn off the main power switch while the power LED ( ) lights or flashes. Doing so may severely damage the hard disk or the memory of the copier. Before turning off the main power switch, press the operation power switch, and wait for the power LED to go out.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes when: 1) the platen cover or ARDF is open 2) the hard disk or memory is accessed 3) the copier is communicating with another device
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
Starting the SP mode
1. Press the clear modes key. " 2. Type “107” at the numeric keypad. #$% 3. Press the clear/stop key and hold it down until the screen
display changes (for about 3 seconds). &
4. Touch “Copy Sp” on the touch screen. Copy SP Quitting the SP mode
1. Touch “Exit” on the touch screen until the screen display changes.
Exit
2. Touch “Exit” on the touch screen until the screen display changes.
Exit
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-2
SP Mode Touch Screen For details on the SP modes, see section 5.1.2.
➀➀➀➀ Expands all SP mode menus. ➁➁➁➁ Collapses all SP mode menus. ➂➂➂➂ Opens the copy window (☛ Copy Window for Test Printing). ➃➃➃➃ Enables numeric keypad inputs for specifying a SP mode menu.
(Type a menu number at the numeric keypad, and press the ' key.) ➄➄➄➄ Quits the SP mode. ➅➅➅➅ Expands or collapses the menu list of each group. ➆➆➆➆ Scrolls up or down through the groups. ➇➇➇➇ Scrolls up or down to the previous or next page. ➈➈➈➈ Scrolls up or down to the previous or next line. ➉➉➉➉ Selects the previous or next menu.
1
6
5432
7 8 9
10
B051S500.WMF
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-3
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
Copy Window for Test Printing 1) Touch the “Copy Window” button (☛ SP Mode Touch Screen). The copy
window is displayed. 2) Adjust the settings if necessary, and press the ( (start) key to make the
test print. 3) Touch the “SP Mode” button (highlighted on the touch screen). The SP
mode screen is displayed. Working on SP Mode Menus The SP mode menus are classified in three levels.
1. Find the necessary SP mode menu from the “SP Mode Table” (☛ 5.1.2). 2. Select an SP using either of the following two operations:
1) Using the numeric key pad a) Make sure the “SP Direct” button is highlighted. (If not, touch the button.) b) Type the SP mode menu number at the numeric key pad.
2) Using the touch screen a) Touch the “Open All” button or the “Group #” button (where the #
indicates the group number which the necessary menu belongs to). b) Scroll the menu if necessary (☛ SP Mode Touch Screen). c) Touch the necessary menu, or touch the “Prev Page” or “Next Page”
button to select the menu. 3. Type the necessary values at the numeric key pad. The value in the input box
is overwritten.
NOTE: 1) “Initial” indicates the default value. 2) To toggle plus/minus, press the ! (clear/stop) key.
4. Press the ' key. If an out-of-range value has been input in the box, the value is ignored. NOTE: If you are prompted to complete the setting, touch “Yes”.
5. Quit the SP mode (☛ Quitting the SP mode).
B051S501.WMF
Input box
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-4
5.1.2 SP MODE TABLE In the “Function/[Setting]” column:
• The related pop-up screen name and function name (if any) appear in parenthesis following the function description.
• Comments are in italics. • The setting range is enclosed in brackets, with the default setting written in
bold. • An asterisk (*) after the mode number means that this mode’s value is stored
in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM reset, all these SP modes will be returned to their factory settings.
• DFU stands for Design/Factory Use only. Values marked DFU should not be changed.
NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, so that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
SP1-XXX: (Feed)
1 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Lead Edge 1 Tray 1: Plain 2 Tray 1: Thick 3 Tray 1: OHP 4 Tray 2: Plain 5 Tray 2: Thick 6 Tray 2: OHP 7 Tray 3 8 Tray 4 9 By-pass: Plain 10 By-pass: Thick 11 By-pass: OHP
001*
12 Duplex
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation timing for each mode. [–9.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] The user mode cannot adjust the settings for thick paper or OHP sheets. NOTE: When adjusting SP1-001-2 or 3, check SP1-001-
1 first. SP1-001-2 and 3 adjust the differences between the leading edge registration positions for the following paper types: 1: Plain paper and thick paper 2: Plain paper and OHP In the same manner, when adjusting SP1-001-5 or 6, check SP1-001-4 first; and when adjusting SP1-001-10 or 11, check SP1-001-9 first.
Side-to-Side 1 By-pass 2 Tray 1 3 Tray 2 4 Tray 3 5 Tray 4
002*
6 Duplex
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode. [–4.0 ~ 4.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] NOTE: When adjusting SP1-002-1, 3, 4, 5, or 6, check
SP1-002-2 first. SP1-002-1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 adjust the differences in the side-to-side registrations between each paper tray and tray 1.
Paper Buckle 1 Tray: Plain Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration
roller by changing the paper feed timing. [–4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
2 Tray: Thick [–4 ~ 6 / –2 / 1 mm/step]
003*
3 Tray: OHP [–4 ~ 6 / –2 / 1 mm/step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-5
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
1 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
4 Tray: Small Size [–4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Small Size includes LT long edge feed and smaller.
5 By-pass: Plain [–4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 6 By-pass: Thick [–4 ~ 6 / –2 / 1 mm/step] 7 By-pass: OHP [–4 ~ 6 / –2 / 1 mm/step]
003*
8 Duplex [–4 ~ 6 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Fusing Temperature
1 Heating: Idling Sets the temperature at which the heating roller starts idling. [100 ~ 180 / 145 / 1°C/step]
2 Heating: Ready Sets the temperature at which the heating roller enters the print ready condition. [100 ~ 180 / 165 / 1°C/step]
3 Heating: Standby Sets the heating roller temperature for the ready (standby) condition. After the main switch has been turned on, the machine enters this condition when the heating roller temperature reaches the temperature specified in this SP mode. When the machine is recovering from energy saver or auto off mode, the machine becomes ready when both heat and pressure roller temperatures reach the specified temperature. Pressure roller: SP1-105-16 [100 ~ 180 / 175 / 1°C/step ]
4 Heating: Plain/1 Color Sets the heating roller temperature for thin paper in single-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 160 / 1°C/step]
5 Heating: Plain/Full Color
Sets the heating roller temperature for thin paper in full-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1°C/step]
6 Heating: Middle Thick/1 Color
Sets the heating roller temperature for normal plain paper in single-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1°C/step]
7 Heating: Middle Thick/Full Color
Sets the heating roller temperature for normal plain paper in full-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 180 / 1°C/step]
8 Heating: Thick/1 Color Sets the heating roller temperature for thick paper in single-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1°C/step]
9 Heating: Thick/Full Color
Sets the heating roller temperature for thick paper in full-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 175 / 1°C/step]
10 Heating: OHP/1 Color Sets the heating roller temperature for OHP sheets in single-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 170 / 1°C/step]
11 Heating: OHP/Full Color
Sets the heating roller temperature for the OHP sheets in full-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 180 / 1°C/step]
105*
12 Heating: Duplex/1 Color
Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing (both sides) in single-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 155 / 1°C/step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-6
1 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
13 Heating: Duplex/Full Color
Sets the heating roller temperature for duplex printing (both sides) in full-color mode. [120 ~ 190 / 165 / 1°C/step]
14 Pressure: Idling Sets the temperature at which the pressure roller starts idling. [30 ~ 100 / 10 / 1°C/step]
15 Pressure: Ready Sets the temperature at which the pressure roller becomes ready for printing. [60 ~ 150 / 70 / 1°C/step]
16 Pressure: Standby Sets the pressure roller temperature for the ready (standby) condition. After the main switch has been turned on, the machine enters this condition when the pressure roller temperature reaches the temperature specified in this SP mode. When the machine is recovering from energy saver or auto off mode, the machine becomes ready when both heat and pressure roller temperatures reach the specified temperature. Heating roller: SP1-105-3 [60 ~ 150 / 120 / 1°C/step]
27 Heating: OFFSET + Sets the heating roller temperature correction for when room temperature is 15°C or lower. [0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1°C/step]
28 Pressure: OFFSET + Sets the pressure roller temperature correction for when room temperature is 15°C or lower. [0 ~ 20 / 0 / 1°C/step]
29 Heat: OFFSET – Sets the heating roller temperature correction for when room temperature is 30°C or higher. [0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1°C/step]
105*
30 Pressure: OFFSET – Sets the pressure roller temperature correction for when room temperature is 30°C or higher. [0 ~ 20 / 0 / 1°C/step]
Temperature Display 1 Heating Roller
106
2 Pressure Roller Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
Fusing Nip 1 Execute Mode Checks the fusing nip width using an OHP sheet.
• The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for the specified time (☛ SP1-109-2).
• The nip width should be 9 ± 0.5 mm at front and rear. If this requirement is not met, change the fusing unit.
109
2 Stop Duration Adjusts the stoppage time for the OHP sheet in the fusing unit (☛ SP1-109-1). [0 ~ 100 / 10 / 1 s/step]
Exit Full Timer 920 1 Exit Full Timer [10 ~ 60 / 10 / 1 s/step] DFU
Fusing Oil Add 930 1 Fusing oil add Forces the oil pump to supply silicone oil up from the oil
tank to the tank in the oil supply unit. If the oil end sensor detects oil in the oil supply unit, this SP will not start the pump.
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-7
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
1 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
LEF Priority–Bypass 940 1 LEF Priority–Bypass Selects the default paper feed direction of the by-pass
tray. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: SEF • 1: LEF The machine detects only the width, but detects the size based on this information. If the setting is 0 (SEF): When A4 LEF is placed in the bypass tray, the machine detects this as A3. A4 SEF will be detected as A4. If the setting is 1 (LEF): The machine will detect A4LEF as A4. However, if A4 SEF is placed in the bypass tray, it will be detected as A5.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-8
SP2-XXX: (Drum)
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Charge Bias 1 [M] 2 [C] 3 [Y] 4 [K] 5 No Image Area
Adjusts the charge corona unit grid voltage. [300 ~ 800 / 500 / 1 Volt/step] Only effective is SP3-003 is set to 0.
001*
6 Charger Current Adjusts the charge corona unit current. [400 ~ 800 / 500 / 1 µA/step]
Magnification Adjustment 1 Main Scan
100*
2 Sub Scan Adjusts the magnification in each scan direction. [–12.8 ~ 12.7 / 0 / 0.01%/step]
Trim Adjustment 1 front Adjusts the width of the white margin.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 2 back 3 lead
101*
4 trail
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Develop Bias Adjustment 1 [M] 2 [C] 3 [Y]
201*
4 [K]
Adjusts the development bias. [0 ~ 500 / 250 / 1 Volt/step] Only effective is SP3-003 is set to 0.
Forced Toner 1 [K] 2 [C] 3 [M] 4 [Y]
208
5 All Color
Forcefully supplies toner to the development unit.
Toner End Set 213 1 Toner End Set Specifies how many sheets can be printed after the
toner near end message. [0 ∼ 255 / 50 / 1 /step] DFU
Trans Belt Bias 1 1 Color: Front Adjusts the transfer belt current.
[30 ∼ 140 / 80 / 10 µA/step] The front side image for 1-color printing
2 1 Color: Rear [30 ∼ 140 / 80 / 10 µA/step] The rear side image for 1-color duplex printing
3 2 Colors: First color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The first color toner image of 2-color printing
4 3 Colors: First color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The first color toner image of 3-color printing
5 4 Colors: First color [30 ∼ 140 / 75 / 10 µA/step] The first color toner image of 4-color printing
6 2 Colors: 2nd color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The second color toner mage of 2-color printing
301
7 3 Colors: 2nd color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The second color toner image of 3-color printing
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-9
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
8 4 Colors: 2nd color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The second color toner image of 4-color printing
9 3 Colors: 3rd color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The third color toner image of 3-color printing
10 4 Colors: 3rd color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The third color toner image of 4-color printing
11 4 Colors: 4th color [30 ∼ 140 / 130 / 10 µA/step] The fourth color toner image of 4-color printing
12 Print start [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] After the first color toner image
13 Print end [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] After the second color toner image
14 After 1st Color [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] After the third color toner image
15 After 2nd Color [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] After the final color toner image
16 After 3rd Color [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] Development start
17 After 4th Color [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] Development end
18 1 Color: Front: Idling [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] Waiting for thick paper or OHP before creating the front side image for 1-color printing
19 1 Color: Rear: Idling [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] Waiting for thick paper or OHP before creating the rear side image for 1-color duplex printing
20 2 Colors: Idling [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] Waiting for thick paper or OHP before creating an image for 2-color printing
21 3 Colors: Idling [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] Waiting for thick paper or OHP before creating an image for 3-color printing
22 4 Colors: Idling [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] Waiting for the thick paper or OHP before creating an image for 4-color printing
301
23 Power On Recovery [30 ∼ 140 / 70 / 10 µA/step] Machine start and jam recovery
Transfer Belt Environment 1 Threshold 1 Adjusts the environmental threshold for the transfer belt.
[0 ~ 100.0 / 3.5 / 0.1 g/m3/step] DFU
303*
2 Threshold 2 [0 ~ 100.0 / 19.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] DFU Transfer Belt Environment
1 LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 85 / 1 %/step] DFU 2 LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 85 / 1 %/step] DFU 3 LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU 4 LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU 5 LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU 6 LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU 7 LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU
304
8 LL/Image/1 Color/1st [50 ~ 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] DFU
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-10
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Transfer Belt Start 305* 1 Bias On Off Sets the bias for the image transfer start to on or off.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step] DFU • 0: Bias off • 1: Bias on
Trans Belt First 1 1 Color Adds the transfer current to the first page to improve
insufficient transfer of the whole solid image. [3.0 ~ 14.0 / 9.0 / 1/step]
306
2 2/3/4 Colors [3.0 ~ 14.0 / 13.0 / 1/step] 1Paper Trans_LL1 (Paper Transfer LL1) LL1: Absolute humidity AH (g/m3) is 0 < AH ≤ 3.5 The display indicates: Paper Weight/Side 1 or 2/Paper Width (mm) Nrml: Thin paper, Mid: Normal plain paper, Thk: Thick paper
1 Normal/1st/-297 Sets the paper transfer current for the ‘LL1’ humidity range (Note: The current for the LL1 range is also affected by SP2-903.) Adjust only if there are problems with insufficient transfer in the image area of the copy for a particular paper type or mode, or in response to field problems as directed by technical support staff. [0 ~ 70.0 / 32.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
2 Normal/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 34.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 3 Normal/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 4 Normal/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 39.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 5 Normal/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 42.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 6 Middle/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 33.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 7 Middle/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 35.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 8 Middle/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 37.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 9 Middle/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 40.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 10 Middle/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 11 Thick/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 16.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 12 Thick/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 19.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 13 Thick/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 21.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 14 Thick/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 15 Thick/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 27.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 16 Normla/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 38.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 17 Normal/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 40.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 18 Normal/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 42.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 19 Normal/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 20 Normal/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 21 Middle/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 39.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 22 Middle/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 41.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 23 Middle/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 24 Middle/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 25 Middle/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 26 Thick/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 16.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 27 Thick/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 19.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
310*
28 Thick/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 21.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-11
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
29 Thick/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 30 Thick/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 26.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 31 OHP/297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 16.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
310*
32 OHP/210 [0 ~ 70.0 / 22.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Paper Trans_LL2 (Paper Transfer LL2) LL2: Absolute humidity AH (g/m3) is 3.5 < AH ≤ 8.0 The display indicates: Paper Weight/Side 1 or 2/Paper Width (mm) Nrml: Thin paper, Mid: Normal plain paper, Thk: Thick paper
1 Normal/1st/-297 Sets the paper transfer current for the ‘LL2’ humidity range. See SP2-310 for comments. [0 ~ 70.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
2 Normal/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 38.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 3 Normal/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 40.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 4 Normal/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 5 Normal/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 46.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 6 Middle/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 37.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 7 Middle/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 39.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 8 Middle/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 41.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 9 Middle/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 10 Middle/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 47.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 11 Thick/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 20.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 12 Thick/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 21.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 13 Thick/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 23.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 14 Thick/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 15 Thick/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 26.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 16 Normal/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 40.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 17 Normal/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 18 Normal/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 19 Normal/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 47.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 20 Normal/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 50.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 21 Middle/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 41.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 22 Middle/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 23 Middle/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 46.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 24 Middle/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 48.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 25 Middle/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 51.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 26 Thick/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 20.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 27 Thick/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 28 Thick/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 27.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 29 Thick/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 31.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 30 Thick/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 34.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 31 OHP/297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 19.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
311*
32 OHP/210 [0 ~ 70.0 / 26.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-12
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Paper Trans_NN1 (Paper Transfer NN1) NN1: Absolute humidity AH (g/m3) is 8.0 < AH ≤ 14 The display indicates: Paper Weight/Side 1 or 2/Paper Width (mm) Nrml: Thin paper, Mid: Normal plain paper, Thk: Thick paper
1 Normal/1st/-297 Sets the paper transfer current for the ‘NN1’ humidity range. See SP2-310 for comments. [0 ~ 70.0 / 40.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
2 Normal/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 42.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 3 Normal/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 4 Normal/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 47.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 5 Normal/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 50.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 6 Middle/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 41.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 7 Middle/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 8 Middle/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 9 Middle/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 47.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 10 Middle/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 51.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 11 Thick/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 23.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 12 Thick/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 23.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 13 Thick/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 14 Thick/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 15 Thick/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 16 Normal/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 42.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 17 Normal/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 18 Normal/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 48.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 19 Normal/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 51.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 20 Normal/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 55.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 21 Middle/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 22 Middle/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 46.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 23 Middle/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 49.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 24 Middle/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 52.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 25 Middle/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 56.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 26 Thick/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 23.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 27 Thick/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 28.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 28 Thick/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 32.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 29 Thick/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 37.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 30 Thick/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 42.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 31 OHP/297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 22.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
312*
32 OHP/210 [0 ~ 70.0 / 30.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Paper Trans_NN2 (Paper Transfer NN2) NN2: Absolute humidity AH (g/m3) is 14 < AH ≤ 19 The display indicates: Paper Weight/Side 1 or 2/Paper Width (mm) Nrml: Thin paper, Mid: Normal plain paper, Thk: Thick paper
1 Normal/1st/-297 Sets the paper transfer current for the ‘NN2’ humidity range. See SP2-310 for comments. [0 ~ 70.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
2 Normal/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 38.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 3 Normal/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 39.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
313*
4 Normal/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 40.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-13
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
5 Normal/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 42.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 6 Middle/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 37.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 7 Middle/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 39.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 8 Middle/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 40.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 9 Middle/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 41.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 10 Middle/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 11 Thick/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 25.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 12 Thick/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 25.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 13 Thick/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 14 Thick/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 15 Thick/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 16 Normal/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 43.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 17 Normal/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 18 Normal/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 46.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 19 Normal/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 48.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 20 Normal/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 50.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 21 Middle/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 22 Middle/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 46.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 23 Middle/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 47.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 24 Middle/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 49.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 25 Middle/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 51.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 26 Thick/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 28.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 27 Thick/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 32.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 28 Thick/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 29 Thick/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 41.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 30 Thick/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 31 OHP/297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 23.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
313*
32 OHP/210 [0 ~ 70.0 / 33.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Paper Trans_HH (Paper Transfer HH). HH: Absolute humidity AH (g/m3) is > 19 The display indicates: Paper Weight/Side 1 or 2/Paper Width (mm) Nrml: Thin paper, Mid: Normal plain paper, Thk: Thick paper
1 Normal/1st/-297 Sets the paper transfer current for the ‘HH’ humidity range. See SP2-310 for comments. [0 ~ 70.0 / 32.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
2 Normal/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 33.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 3 Normal/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 33.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 4 Normal/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 34.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 5 Normal/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 34.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 6 Middle/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 33.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 7 Middle/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 34.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 8 Middle/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 34.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 9 Middle/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 35.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 10 Middle/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 35.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 11 Thick/1st/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 26.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 12 Thick/1st/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 25.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 13 Thick/1st/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 25.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
314*
14 Thick/1st/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-14
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
15 Thick/1st/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 16 Normal/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 17 Normal/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 18 Normal/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 19 Normal/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 20 Normal/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 21 Middle/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 22 Middle/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 23 Middle/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 24 Middle/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 25 Middle/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 45.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 26 Thick/2nd/-297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 28.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 27 Thick/2nd/257-296 [0 ~ 70.0 / 32.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 28 Thick/2nd/210-256 [0 ~ 70.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 29 Thick/2nd/129-209 [0 ~ 70.0 / 40.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 30 Thick/2nd/-128 [0 ~ 70.0 / 44.0 / 0.1 µA/step] 31 OHP/297 [0 ~ 70.0 / 24.0 / 0.1 µA/step]
314*
32 OHP/210 [0 ~ 70.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 µA/step] Paper Trans_Col (Paper Transfer Correction) The display indicates: Paper Type/Side 1 or 2/Printing mode
1 Normal/1st/1 Color Corrects the electric current for paper transfer. DFU [0 ~ 100 / 45 / 1%/step]
2 Normal/1st/2 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 90 / 1%/step] 3 Normal/1st/3 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 100 / 1%/step] 4 Normal/2nd/1 Color [0 ~ 100 / 45 / 1%/step] 5 Normal/2nd/2 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 90 / 1%/step] 6 Normal/2nd/3 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 100 / 1%/step] 7 Thick/1st/1 Color [0 ~ 100 / 45 / 1%/step] 8 Thick/1st/2 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 90 / 1%/step] 9 Thick/1st/3 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 100 / 1%/step] 10 Thick/2nd/1 Color [0 ~ 100 / 45 / 1%/step] 11 Thick/2nd/2 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 90 / 1%/step] 12 Thick/2nd/3 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 100 / 1%/step] 13 OHP/1 Color [0 ~ 100 / 60 / 1%/step] 14 OHP/2 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 90 / 1%/step]
320*
15 OHP/3 Colors [0 ~ 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Paper Transfer Bias of Edge
1 Normal/1st/Leading edge
2 Normal/2nd/Leading edge
3 Thick/1st/Leading edge
4 Thick/2nd/Leading edge
5 OHP/Leading edge
321
6 Normal/1st/Trailing edge
Adjusts the paper transfer current at the paper edges. [10.0 ~ 20.0 / 10.0 / 0.1 times/step] DFU The specified values indicate how many times larger the current at the edge is.
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-15
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
7 Normal/2nd/Trailing edge
8 Thick/1st/Trailing edge 9 Thick/2nd/Trailing
edge
321
10 OHP/Trailing edge
Adjusts the paper transfer current at the paper edges. [10.0 ~ 20.0 / 10.0 / 0.1 times/step] DFU The specified values indicate how many times larger the current at the edge is.
Paper Transfer Charge 1 Leading edge
322
2 Trailing Edge Adjusts the width at the paper edges where the current specified with SP2–321 is applied. [0 ~ 30 / 30 / 1 mm/step] DFU The values indicate the distance from the paper edges.
Paper Transfer Cleaning 1 Cleaning Negative Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning current. The current is
applied before and after printing jobs and during jam recovery. [0 ~ 255 / 150 / 0.1 µA/step] DFU
2 Cleaning Positive [0 ~ 255 / 150 / 0.1 µA/step] DFU
323
3 Cleaning Negative Lubrication
[0 ~ 255 / 50 / 0.1 µA/step] DFU
Print Start Cleaning 331 1 Print Start Cleaning Enables/disables cleaning before printing jobs.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU • 0: Disables • 1: Enables
Cleaning Bias LL1 1 1 Color Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute
humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range: 0 < AH ≤ 3.5 (this is the ‘LL1’ humidity range) DFU [0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
2 2 Colors-4 Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step] 3 Half Speed/1 Color [0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step] 4 Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 10 Volt/step]
5 ID pattern [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 6 No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
400*
7 Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] Cleaning Bias LL2
1 1 Color Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range: 3.5 < AH ≤ 8.0 (this is the ‘LL2’ humidity range) DFU [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
2 2 Colors-4 Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 3 Half Speed/1 Color [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 4 Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
5 ID pattern [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 6 No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
401*
7 Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-16
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Cleaning Bias NN1 1 1 Color Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute
humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range: 8.0 < AH ≤ 14 (this is the ‘NN1’ humidity range) DFU [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
2 2 Colors-4 Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step] 3 Half Speed/1 Color [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step] 4 Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
5 ID pattern [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 6 No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
402*
7 Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] Cleaning Bias NN2
1 1 Color Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range: 14 < AH ≤ 19 (this is the ‘NN2’ humidity range) DFU [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
2 2 Colors-4 Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step] 3 Half Speed/1 Color [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step] 4 Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
5 ID pattern [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 6 No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
403*
7 Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] Cleaning Bias HH
1 1 Color Adjusts the transfer belt cleaning voltage when absolute humidity AH (g/m3) is in the following range: 19 < AH (this is the ‘HH’ humidity range) DFU [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
2 2 Colors-4 Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step] 3 Half Speed/1 Color [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step] 4 Half Speed/2 Colors-4
Colors [0 ~ 2000 / 1700 / 10 Volt/step]
5 ID pattern [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step] 6 No Image Area [0 ~ 2000 / 1400 / 10 Volt/step]
404*
7 Jam Recovery [0 ~ 2000 / 1600 / 10 Volt/step]
Fusing Bias 1 Normal/1 Color/1st Adjusts the fusing bias voltage. DFU
[1000 ~ 4000 / 3000 / 100 Volt/step] 2 Normal/1 Color/2nd [1000 ~ 4000 / 3000 / 100 Volt/step] 3 Normal/Full Color/1st [1000 ~ 4000 / 2500 / 100 Volt/step] 4 Normal/Full Color/2nd [1000 ~ 4000 / 2500 / 100 Volt/step] 5 Thick/1 Color/1st [1000 ~ 4000 / 3000 / 100 Volt/step] 6 Thick/1 Color/2nd [1000 ~ 4000 / 3000 / 100 Volt/step] 7 Thick/Full Color/1st [1000 ~ 4000 / 2500 / 100 Volt/step]
500*
8 Thick/Full Color/2nd [1000 ~ 4000 / 2500 / 100 Volt/step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-17
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Fusing Bias Switch 501* 1 Fusing Bias Switch Switches the fusing and discharge pin bias control on or
off. [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step] DFU • 0: Control off • 1: Control on
Discharge Bias 1 H
502
2 L Adjusts the discharge plate voltage (paper separation from transfer belt). [–4000 ∼ –1000 / –2500 / 100 Volt/step]
Charge Cleaning Interval 801* 1 Charge Cleaning
Interval Sets the charge corona unit cleaning interval. [0 ~ 5000 / 600 / 100 counts/step] See section 6 for details. SP7-925 displays the number of counts since the last cleaning.
Charger Cleaning 802 1 Charger Cleaning Executes a forced charge corona unit cleaning.
Set to 1 to start cleaning. Environment Control 901*
1 Environment Control Switches environment control on or off. [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step] DFU • 0: Control off (The paper transfer and cleaning bias
environments are set to NN1. The image transfer bias environment is set to MM.)
• 1: Control on Charge Cleaning Status 902
1 Charge Cleaning Status
[0 ~ 9 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Cleaner has stopped 1: Cleaner moving from front to rear 3: Cleaner moving from rear to front (back to the home position)
Paper Transfer Adjustment 903 1 LL1: Plain Specifies the difference from the LL1 paper transfer
current (SP2-310). [0 ~ 7.0 / 8.0 / 1 µA/step] The specified value is subtracted from the value specified by SP2-310 under the following conditions: • The machine is in the LL1 environment. • 400 images or less are created after the machine
starts. 1C Bias Adjustment
1 M Default 50V DFU 2 C Default 0V DFU 3 Y Default 0V DFU
904
4 K Default 0V DFU Temperature Humidity Display
1 Temperature Displays the temperature measured by the temperature sensor inside the machine. [–127 ~ 127 / 0 / 1°C/step]
912*
2 Humidity 1 Displays the humidity measured by the humidity sensor inside the machine. [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-18
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
3 Humidity 2 Displays the absolute humidity calculated from the temperature/humidity sensor readings. [0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
912*
4 Environment Level Displays the current humidity level calculated from the absolute humidity. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] • LL1: 0 < AH ≤ 3.5 • LL2: 3.5 < AH ≤ 8.0 • NN1: 8.0 < AH ≤ 14 • NN2: 14 < AH ≤ 19 • HH: 19 < AH
* AH = absolute humidity OPC lubricant interruption (Forced OPC lubrication) 939
1 Enables/disables forced OPC lubrication at a certain interval. DFU [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disabled • 1: Enabled The OPC lubrication interval is specified with SP2-942-1.
OPC Lubricant Mode 940 1 OPC Lubricant Mode Executes a forced OPC lubrication to reduce the friction
on the OPC belt. DFU The OPC belt and the lubricant brush operate for 2 minutes.
OPC Lubricant Time 1 Interrupt Determines how long the OPC belt is lubricated for after
the end of every job (☛ SP3–940). [0 ~ 30 / 20 / 1 s/step]
941
2 No Interrupt Determines how long the OPC belt is lubricated at the forced lubrication. [0 ~ 60 / 10 / 1 s/step]
OPC Lubricant Interval 942 1 OPC Lubricant Interval The machine lubricates the OPC belt and image transfer
belt at the interval (number of prints) set with this SP. Incoming print jobs do not interrupt the lubrication. [10 ~ 65535 / 50 / 10/step] DFU Set SP2-939-1 to 1 to execute the forced OPC lubrication.
OPC Lubrication: High Coverage 944 1 Setting Enables/disables OPC lubrication after a certain amount
of images are printed. The lubrication timing depends on SP2-944-2 to -5. [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Disables • 1: Enables When high coverage images are continuously printed, cleaning of the OPC may not be enough. To correct this, OPC lubrication is carried out during printing (lubrication time: around 34 seconds).
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-19
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
2 Image Coverage–1 Specifies standard average coverage condition 1. [50 ~ 800 / 300 / 10 units/step] OPC lubrication is executed under the following conditions. • After the previous OPC lubrication, the number of
output pages reaches the value specified with SP2-944-4.
• The average coverage of the outputs after the previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average coverage condition 1.
3 Image Coverage–2 Specifies standard average coverage condition 2. [50 ~ 800 / 200 / 10 units/step] OPC lubrication is executed under the following conditions. • After the previous OPC lubrication, the number of
output pages reaches the value specified with SP2-944-5.
• The average coverage of the outputs after the previous OPC lubrication exceeds standard average coverage condition 2.
4 Sheets–1 [10 ~ 80 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
944
5 Sheets–2 [10 ~ 80 / 40 / 1 sheet/step] Start Registration Adjustment
1 Start Registration Adjustment 1–K
Color registration adjustment: Adjusts the start timing of imaging for each color. [–3 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 line/step] DFU 2 lines = 0.047566 ms (about 85 µm) • +: Delays the start timing. • –: Advances the start timing. • The start timing is adjusted only in plain paper mode,
and when one of the following conditions is satisfied: 1) Between the two images on the transfer belt (when
two images are developed on the OPC at the same time (☛ 6.2))
2) B4 SEF or larger (multi-print job) 2 Start Registration
Adjustment 1–M [–3 ~ 3 / –1 / 1 line/step]
3 Start Registration Adjustment 1–C
[–3 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 line/step]
4 Start Registration Adjustment 1–Y
[–3 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 line/step]
5 Start Registration Adjustment 2–K
[–3 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 line/step]
6 Start Registration Adjustment 2–M
[–3 ~ 3 / –1 / 1 line/step]
7 Start Registration Adjustment 2–C
[–3 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 line/step]
950
8 Start Registration Adjustment 2–Y
[–3 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 line/step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-20
2 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Clock Phase Control 1 LD 1
951
2 LD 2 Adjusts the clock phase of the LD to reduce the density difference between the left and right sides of the printout when the color misalignment correction (SP2–952–1) is enabled. [0 ~ 8 / 0 / 1 /step] Do this after installing a new laser unit; see Replacement and Adjustment for details.
Color Misalignment Correction 952 1 Color Misalignment
Correction Selects either color misalignment correction or reduction in density difference between the left and right sides of pages. [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 1: on
The data for LD1 and LD2 are switched between the left and right sides of each page. This is done because of the difference in the output of each LD. However, in some cases this correction may cause density differences between sides.
• 0: off Use this setting if there are density differences between sides.
Oil Removal Mode 1 Oil Removal Enables/disables the settings of SP2–970–2 through 4.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Disables • 1: Enables Oil on duplex copies gets on the transfer belt, and this can cause uneven image density. To remove this oil, printing stops, the PCU turns, and the cleaning unit removes the oil.
2 Print Interruption Enables/disables interruption of the oil removal process. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disables • 1: Enables If interruption is enabled, the user does not need to wait until the oil removal process ends, but the output image may be poor.
3 Number of Continuation
Specifies how many times the oil removal process is repeated. [1 ~ 20 / 5 / 1 /step] The more times the oil removal is repeated, the better the output images are; but the longer it takes.
970
4 Number of Duplex Specifies how often the oil removal process is done. The unit is the number of duplex prints. The counter counts down once every narrow (A4 SEF or less) duplex sheet, and counts back up 1 for every other type of sheet. [1 ~ 50 / 10 / 1 /step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-21
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
SP3-XXX: (Process)
3 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Process Control 1 Execute Does a forced process control, and displays the result as
one of the following codes.
001
2 Display Displays the completion code. • 0: Normal termination • 103: Error (ID sensor inactive → Defective ID sensor,
Defective circuit, Defective BCU board) • 104: Error (ID sensor unable to receive light →
Defective OPC belt, Dirty OPC belt, Defective ID sensor, Defective circuit, Defective BCU board)
• 105: Error (ID sensor unable to receive reflection from OPC → Same as “104”)
• 110: Error (Cyan: ID sensor unable to detect correct image)
• 111: Error (Magenta: ID sensor unable to detect correct image)
• 112: Error (Yellow: ID sensor unable to detect correct image)
• 113: Error (Cyan: ID sensor unable to detect correct image)
• 114: Error (Magenta: ID sensor unable to detect correct image)
• 115: Error (Yellow: ID sensor unable to detect correct image)
• 116: Error (Black: ID sensor unable to detect correct image)
• 118: Error (Black image not detected) • 123: Error (Development bias error; Black ID sensor
unable to detect correct image) Solutions for codes 110 to 123: • Poor connection to the development unit • Dirty development bias terminal • Abnormal development bias • PCU not installed correctly • LD unit defective • Abnormal charge corona voltage • Defective BICU
Process Control DFU 1 LED [0 ~ 255 / 150 / 1 /step] 2 Bk Out [0 ~ 0xFFFF / 0 / 1 /step] 3 Bk Led Off Out [0 ~ 0xFFFF / 0 / 1 /step] 4 Color Out [0 ~ 0xFFFF / 0 / 1 /step] 5 Color Led Off Out [0 ~ 0xFFFF / 0 / 1 /step] 6 ID Sensor Target [0 ~ 5000 / 1500 / 1 /step] 7 ID sensor Out
Adjustment [800 ~ 12000 / 1000 / 1 /step]
10 Bk Vg Control [0 ~ 1000 / 250 / 1 /step] 11 Color Vg Control [0 ~ 1000 / 400 / 1 /step] 12 Color Vd Control [0 ~ 1000 / 150 / 1 /step] 13 gamma M [–30000 ~ 30000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
002
14 gamma C [–30000 ~ 30000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-22
3 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
15 gamma Y [–30000 ~ 30000 / 2000 / 1 /step] 16 Gamma K [–30000 ~ 30000 / 5000 / 1 /step] 17 Invariable-M [–3000 ~ 3000 / 150 / 1 /step] 18 Invariable-C [–3000 ~ 3000 / 150 / 1 /step] 19 Invariable-Y [–3000 ~ 3000 / 150 / 1 /step] 20 Invariable-K [–3000 ~ 3000 / 0 / 1 /step] 21 OPC Target M [400 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 /step] 22 OPC Target C [400 ~ 2000 / 620 / 1 /step] 23 OPC Target Y [400 ~ 2000 / 570 / 1 /step] 24 OPC Target K [400 ~ 2000 / 850 / 1 /step] 25 Charge V Offset M [100 ~ 600 / 280 / 1 /step] 26 Charge V Offset C [100 ~ 600 / 280 / 1 /step] 27 Charge V Offset Y [100 ~ 600 / 280 / 1 /step] 28 Charge V Offset K [100 ~ 600 / 280 / 1 /step] 29 ID sensor Target 1M [0 ~ 5000 / 1400 / 1 /step] 30 ID sensor Target 1
Color [0 ~ 5000 / 1400 / 1 /step]
31 ID sensor Target 1Y [0 ~ 5000 / 1400 / 1 /step] 32 ID sensor Target 2M [0 ~ 1000 / 200 / 1 /step] 33 ID sensor Target 2
Colors [0 ~ 1000 / 200 / 1 /step]
34 ID sensor Target 2Y [0 ~ 1000 / 200 / 1 /step] 35 ID sensor Target 2K [0 ~ 2000 / 1200 / 1 /step] 36 Color Development
Bias [50 ~ 300 / 100 / 1 /step]
37 Bk Development Bias [50 ~ 300 / 50 / 1 /step] 38 Bias Charge [0 ~ 1000 / 20 / 1 /step] 52 Absolute Temperature [0 ~ 200 / 150 / 1 /step] 53 Previous Temperature [0 ~ 100 / 15 / 1 /step]
002
54 Timer Counter [0 ~ 5000 / 1440 / 1 /step] Lubricant Interval 003*
1 Lubricant Interval Sets the process control interval. [0 ~ 1000 / 200 / 10 sheet/step] • 0: Disables automatic process control
Environment Change 1 Temperature Sets the temperature/humidity change that triggers
process control (process control is done if temperature or humidity has changed by this amount since the previous process control). [0 ~ 100 / 15 / 1°C/step]
004*
2 Humidity [0 ~ 100 / 150 / 1 g/m3/step] Process control Pre-Rotate 005*
1 Process control Pre-Rotate
PCU and development unit idling is done before process control. This value determines the amount of idling rotation. [1 ~ 5 / 1 / 1 turn/step] • 1 turn: A3 length
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-23
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
3 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Density Adjustment 1 M/A Correction
006*
2 Highlight Correction Select the toner density compensation level for process control. If prints are not dark enough when making multi-print jobs, increasing this value ensures that prints will be darker after the next process control. The default (0) is for no correction. SP3-006-1: Use this one if the density of solid areas is not satisfactory. SP3-006-2: Use this one if the density of highlight areas is not satisfactory. [0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1/step] • 0: None • 1: Weak • 2: Medium • 3: Strong The higher the value, the darker the prints will be.
Process control/LD: Pre-ACC self-check setting 125 1 ACC self-check setting Enables/disables process control execution before ACC.
[0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step] • 0: Disabled • 1: Enabled
LD-POWER 1 LD 1
901
2 LD 2 Specifies the LD power. DFU [0 ∼ 65535 / 716 / 1 /step]
Doctor Interval 1 Color If the number of pages in a job exceeds this number, the
doctor roller rotates in reverse at the end of the job. [0 ~ 50 / 50 / 1 sheet/step] • The value indicates how many sheets are output
before the doctor roller is reversed. (Sheet counts are converted into equivalent A4-LEF sheet counts.)
• The roller is reversed for 16 seconds • Reversing the roller removes toner blockages. • The sheet count is reset after reverse rotation. • The machine waits until the end of the job before
reversing the doctor roller. • Decrease the value when vertical white lines appear
on prints. 2 Black [0 ~ 65535 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
910*
3 Job end If at the end of a job, the roller has not been reversed since more than this number of pages, the roller is reversed at the end of the job. [0 ~ 65535 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
Lubrication Cleaning Time 920* 1 Lubrication Cleaning
Time Sets the OPC belt lubrication period. DFU [0 ~ 100 / 100 / 1%/step] • When 100 is specified, the OPC belt cleaning clutch is
always on whenever the OPC is turning, so the OPC gets lubricated. When 50 is specified, the clutch is only on half the time that the motor is on.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-24
3 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Lubricant time 1 Job end Specifies the duration of lubrication at the end of jobs.
[0 ~ 30 / 20 / 1 /step] DFU
921*
2 Doctor roller reverse operation
Specifies the duration of lubrication during reverse doctor roller rotation. [0 ~ 30 / 20 / 1 /step] DFU
Job End Interruption 940 1 Job End Interruption The OPC belt is lubricated after the end of every job
(SP2–941–1). This SP determines whether the lubrication is interrupted when a job arrives at the printer.[0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Interrupted • 1: Not interrupted
Image Area Rate 1 M Specifies the minimum image area (expressed as a
percentage of an A4 page) required to maintain optimum development unit condition (☛ Toner Revitalization: SP3–971). [0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step] After 20 sheets over a number of small jobs (or after 50 sheets in one job), if the developed area is less than the value of this SP mode, toner is transferred to the image transfer belt and cleaned off. This is performed during the doctor roller reverse rotation.
2 C [0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step] 3 Y [0 ~ 10.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 %/step]
970
4 Bk [0 ~ 10.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 %/step] Toner Revitalization 971
1 Toner Revitalization Enables/disables the toner revitalization. [0 ~ 1 / 0/ 1 /step] • 0: Disables • 1: Enables Continuous printing with a relatively low coverage ratio (CMYK less than 5% each) tends to reduce the charge potential of the toner, because the toner remains in the hopper for a long time. This can lead to spots on the copy. Toner revitalization removes this defective toner periodically.
1C Idling 980 1 1C Idling Enables/disables 1-color idling after paper transfer.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disables • 1: Enables Set this to 1 if the user complains about diagonal lines in solid areas of prints that only use one toner color (M, C, or Y).
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-25
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
SP4-XXX: (Scanner)
4 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Scanner Sub Scan Magnification 008* 1 Scanner Sub Scan
Magnification Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for scanning. [0.0 ~ 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step] Use the ! key to toggle between + and – before entering the value. The specification is ± 1%. See “Replacement and Adjustment – Copy Adjustment” for details.
Scanner Leading Edge Registration 010 1 Scanner Leading Edge
Registration Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen mode. [–3.0 ~ 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] (–): The image moves in the direction of the leading edge. Use the ! key to toggle between + and – before entering the value. The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment – Copy Adjustment” for details.
Scanner Side-to-side Registration 011* 1 Scanner Side-to-side
Registration Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode. [–6.0 ~ +6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step] (–): The image disappears at the left side. (+): The image appears. Use the ! key to toggle between + and – before entering the value. The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment – Copy Adjustment” for details.
Scanner Blank Margin 1 Leading Edge 2 Trailing Edge 3 Left
012*
4 Right
Adjusts the erase margin at each side for scanning. [0.0 ~ 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Do not adjust this unless the user wishes to have a scanner margin that is greater than the printer margin.
Scanner Free Run 1 Lamp: OFF
013
2 Lamp: ON Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off. Press ON on the touch panel to start this feature. Press OFF on the touch panel to stop.
Scan 1 Shading ON
017
2 Shading OFF Performs a scanner free run with shading on or off. Only one scan is made. Press ON on the touch panel to start this feature. Press OFF on the touch panel to stop.
Black ADS Level 205 1 Black ADS Level Adjusts the erased background level for black-&-white
ADS. [0 ∼ 128 / 64 / 1 /step]
APS Data Confirmation 301 1 APS Data
Confirmation Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF cover sensor.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-26
4 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
APS Minimum Size Setting 303 1 Selects whether the copier determines that the original is
A5 size when the APS sensor cannot detect the size. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] If “A5 lengthwise” is selected, paper sizes that cannot be detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5 lengthwise. If “Not detected” is selected, “Cannot detect original size” will be displayed.
IPU Test Pattern 417 1 Prints test patterns from the IPU video data outputs.
• 0: Scanning Image • 1: Checker • 2: Oblique Checker • 3: Horizontal Gray Scale • 4: Vertical Gray Scale • 5: RGB YMCK Scale • 6: UCR Gray Scale • 7: Color Patch 16 Steps 1 • 8: Color Patch 16 Steps 2 • 9: Color Patch 64 Steps • 10: Checker (YMCK) • 11: Patch (YMCK) • 12: Banding 1 (Gray) • 13: Banding 2 (Gray) • 14: Horizontal Gray Scale 2 • 15: Scanning Image + Checker • 16: Scanning Image + Gray Scale Change to the copy mode display by pressing the Interrupt key, then print the test pattern.
Saturation Adjustment 440 1 Adjusts the colour chroma for the scanner.
[0 ∼ 5 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU Printer Vector
1 R:K 2 R:C 3 R:M 4 R:Y 5 Y:K 6 Y:C 7 Y:M 8 Y:Y 9 G:K 10 G:C 11 G:M 12 G:Y 13 C:K 14 C:C 15 C:M 16 C:Y 17 B:K
540
18 B:C
Adjust the vector correction of the filter in the CCD on the SBU unit. [–128 ∼ 127 / 0 / 1 /step] When replacing the SBU, input the data from the data sheet that is included with the spare SBU unit.
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-27
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
4 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
19 B:M 20 B:Y 21 M:K 22 M:C 23 M:M
540
24 M:Y
Adjust the vector correction of the filter in the CCD on the SBU unit. [–128 ∼ 127 / 0 / 1 /step] When replacing the SBU, input the data from the data sheet that is included with the spare SBU unit.
Gain Adjustment: R 1 R EVEN
628
2 R ODD Displays the values of the even and odd gain adjustment.
Gain Adjustment: G 1 R EVEN
629
2 R ODD Displays the values of the even and odd gain adjustment.
Gain Adjustment: B 1 R EVEN
630
2 R ODD Displays the values of the even and odd gain adjustment.
Reference Adjustment: R 685 1 Reference Adjustment:
R Adjusts the ADC reference voltage. Details are in Replacement and Adjustment. [0 ∼ 255 / 136 / 1 /step]
Reference Adjustment: G 686 1 Reference Adjustment:
G Adjusts the ADC reference voltage. [0 ∼ 255 / 136 / 1 /step]
Reference Adjustment: B 687 1 Reference Adjustment:
B Adjusts the ADC reference voltage. [0 ∼ 255 / 136 / 1 /step]
DF: Density Adjustment 688 1 DF: Density
Adjustment Adjusts the brightness for scanning using the ARDF. [83 ∼ 100 / 86 / 1 %/step] The density when scanning from the DF exposure glass tends to be higher than the density from the main exposure glass. SP4-688 adjusts the density on the DF exposure glass.
DF: Density Correction 1 DF: Density
Correction: R Adjusts the red density when scanning with the ARDF [–20 ∼ 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
2 DF: Density Correction: G
Adjusts the green density when scanning with the ARDF [–20 ∼ 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
800
3 DF: Density Correction: B
Adjusts the blue density when scanning with the ARDF [–20 ∼ 20 / 0 / 1 %/step]
ACC Data Display 1 R DATA 1 2 G DATA 1 3 B DATA 1 4 R DATA 2 5 G DATA 2
902
6 B DATA 2
Displays ACC data. [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-28
4 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Vertical Line Correction 903 1 Vertical Line
Correction Adjusts the strength of the vertical line's correction with sheet through DF. [0 ∼ 4 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: No adjustment • 1: Low level adjustment • 2: Middle-low level adjustment • 3: Middle-high level adjustment • 4: High level adjustment
BICU Board Test 1 test 1: register access
test Tests the BICU board The following are completion codes: 00: Normal end 11: JTONE (DFID) error 12: CPR (DFID) error 13: IDU (DFID) error 14: Separation ASIC error 15: MaCKY error
904
2 test 2: image path test The following are completion codes: 00: Normal end 21: JTONE (DFID) error, Field memory error 22: CPR (DFID) error, MaCKY, DFID, Field memory
error 23: JTONE (DFID), Separation error 24: Separation error, CPR error, MaCKY error, DFID
error, Field memory error Dither selection 905*
1 Dither selection [0 ∼ 255 / 1 / 1 /step] DFU Binary Threshold 906
1 Binary Threshold Specifies the black/white threshold for binary image processing. [0 ∼ 255 / 128 / 1 /step] Lower values increase the proportion of black in the image.
VPU Test Pattern Selection 1 select any test pattern:
R 2 select any test pattern:
G
907
3 select any test pattern: B
[0 ∼ 4 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: CCD • 1: Black • 2: White • 3: 15-grade gray scale • 4: Vertical line
Manual Gamma Adjustment 918 Please refer to section 3.13.2 Picture Element Correction
1 R: Left 2 R: Right 3 B: Left
932*
4 B: Right
Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD. [0 ∼ 9 / 5 / 1 /step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-29
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
SP5-XXX: (Mode)
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Set Display Language 009 1 Set Display Language Selects the language on the display.
[1 ∼ 16 / 1 / 1 /step] • 1: Japanese • 2: English (British) • 3: English (American) • 4: French • 5: German • 6: Italian • 7: Spanish • 8: Dutch • 9: Norwegian • 10: Danish • 11: Swedish • 12: Polish • 13: Portuguese • 14: Hungarian • 15: Czech • 16: Finnish
Turn off and on the main power switch to validate SP5-009.
mm/inch Display Selection 024 1 mm/inch Display
Selection Selects a unit system. North America: [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] Europe: [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] • 0: Millimeters • 1: Inches
Charge Counter Display 045* 1 Charge Counter
Display Changes the counter method. The setting can only be changed once. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Developments • 1: Prints
ROM Update Display 046* 1 ROM Update Enables or disables the ROM Update utility. When
enabled, this utility will be displayed in the user program mode. DFU [0 or 1 / 1 / –] • 0: Enabled • 1: Disabled
A3/11x17 count 104* 1 A3/11x17 count The counters count double for A3/11" x 17".
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] • 0: Normal count • 1: Double count
Custom size Setting 112 1 Custom size Setting Allows/does not allow custom paper sizes.
[0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Not allowed • 1: Allowed
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-30
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Optional Counter Type 113 1 Optional Counter Type Determines the type of accounting device.
[0 ∼ 9 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: None • 1: Key card (RK2, RK3, RK4) • 2: Key card (subtracting) • 3: Prepaid card • 4: Coin lock • 5: MF key card • 6: (not used) • 7: (not used) • 8: Key counter (excluding vendors) • 9: Barcode printer
Disable copying 118 [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Copying enabled 1: Copying disabled
Counter Up Timing 121 1 Counter Up Timing Selects the accounting timing.
[0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Paper feed • 1: Paper exit
SP5-121 affects only the timing for sending signals to the accounting device. The counters for other units or devices are not affected.
F Original Size 126 1 F Original Size Specifies the type of F-size paper.
[0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: 81/2" x 13" SEF • 1: 81/4" x 13" SEF • 2: 8" x 13" SEF
APS Mode 127 1 APS Mode Enables or disables the APS (Auto Paper Selection)
mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Enables • 1: Disables
Combination (Op. Counter) 128 1 Combination (Op.
Counter) [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU • 0: • 1:
Page Numbering 3 Duplex Printout
Right/Left Position
212
4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position
Adjusts the positions of page numbers. [–99 ∼ 99 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-31
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Setting Time 1 Setting Time Sets the clock.
302
2 Time zone Sets the time zone. North America: [–1440 ∼ 1440 / –300 / 1 minute/step] Europe: [–1440 ∼ 1440 / 60 / 1 minute/step]
Values indicate the time difference from the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). “–300” indicates the eastern standard time of Canada and the United States of America. “60” indicates the standard time of the French Republic.
Auto Off Set 1 ON/OFF Determines the auto-off timer adjustment range that is
available for SP5-305-2. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] • 0: 10 minutes to 240 minutes • 1: 0 minutes to 240 minutes
305
2 Set Timer Specifies the auto-off timer value. [0 ∼ 14400 / 3600 / 1 second/step]
When SP5-305-1 is set to 1, SP5-305-2 has a range of 0 minutes to 240 minutes. 0 means AOF is disabled (the machine never switches itself off).
Access Control 1 Copy: User Code (UC) Activates/inactivates copy mode access control using
user codes. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to use copy mode. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.
2 Copy: Key Counter (KC)
Activates/inactivates the key counter for copy mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs copy mode operations.
401*
3 Copy: Coin Lock (CL) Activates/inactivates the accounting device for copy mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs copy mode operations.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-32
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
11 DS: User Code (UC) Activates/inactivates document server access control using user codes. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to use document server mode. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.
12 DS: Key Counter (KC) Activates/inactivates the key counter for document server mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs document server operations.
13 DS: Coin Lock (CL) Activates/inactivates the accounting device for document server mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs document server operations.
21 Fax: User Code (UC) Activates/inactivates fax mode access control using user codes. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to use fax mode. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered..
22 Fax: Key Counter (KC) Activates/inactivates the key counter for fax mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs fax mode operations.
401*
23 Fax: Coin Lock (CL) Activates/inactivates the accounting device for fax mode.[0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs the fax mode operations.
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-33
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
31 Scanner: User Code (UC)
Activates/inactivates scanner mode access control using user codes [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to use scanner mode. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.
32 Scanner: Key Counter (KC)
Activates/inactivates the key counter for scanner mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs scanner mode operations.
33 Scanner: Coin Lock (CL)
Activates/inactivates the accounting device for scanner mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs the scanner mode operations.
41 Printer: User Code (UC)
Activates/inactivates printer mode access control using user codes. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to use printer mode. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.
If SP5-401-44 is activated, the user codes can be automatically registered.
42 Printer: Key Counter (KC)
Activates/inactivates the key counter for printer mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs printer mode operations.
401*
43 Printer: Coin Lock (CL) Activates/inactivates the accounting device for printer mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs the printer mode operations.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-34
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
44 Printer: UC Auto Activates the auto user code registration function (prints are counted and logged for each user code and the counts can be viewed with SmartNetMonitor). [0 ~ 1 / 1 / 1/step]0: Inactivated • 1: Activated
51 Copy: UC Mono color Activates/inactivates mono color copying access control using user codes. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to make mono color copies. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.
52 Copy: KC Mono color Activates/inactivates the key counter for mono color copying. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs mono color copy operations.
53 Copy: LC Mono color Activates/inactivates the accounting device for mono color copying. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs mono color copy mode operations.
54 Copy: UC Twin color Activates/inactivates two-color copying access control using user codes [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to make two-color copies. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.
55 Copy: KC Twin Color Activates/inactivates the key counter for two-color copying. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs two-color copy operations..
401*
56 Copy: CL Twin Color Activates/inactivates the accounting device for two-color copying. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs two-color copy mode operations.
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-35
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
57 Copy: UC Full Color Activates/inactivates full color copying access control using user codes. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to make full color copies. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.
58 Copy: KC Full Color Activates/inactivates the key counter for full color copying. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs full color copy operations.
59 Copy: CL Full Color Activates/inactivates the accounting device for full color copying. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs full color copy mode operations.
61 Printer: UC Color Activates/inactivates full color printing access control using user codes. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the users must input their user codes to make full color prints. To select 1, one or more user codes must be registered.
62 Printer: KC Color Activates/inactivates the key counter for full color printing. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the key counter logs full color printing operations.
401*
63 Printer: CL Color Activates/inactivates the accounting device for full color printing. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Inactivates • 1: Activates
When 1 (activates) is selected, the accounting device logs full color print mode operations
User Code Counter Clear 404 1 User Code Counter
Clear Clears the user code counter.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-36
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Access code 1 Password Registers/changes the password for the key operator.
[0 ∼ 99999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
“0” indicates no code has been registered. SP7-810 can be used to clear the key operator password.
409
2 Access Area Decides which programs require key operator codes. [0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: None • 1: Some key operator user tool settings • 2: All user tool programs
PM Alarm 1 PM Alarm Level
501
2 Original Count Alarm Specifies the PM alarm level. [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disables the PM alarm • 1 ∼ 255: Specifies the PM alarm level.
The PM alarm occurs when L x 1000 >= C, where L is the specified level and C is the current PM counter value.
Jam alarm Japan Only 1 Jam Alarm Selects the jam alarm level.
[0 ∼ 3 / 3 / 1 /step] • 0: Z (none) • 1: L (6K x 1/4) • 2: M (6K x 1/2) • 3: H (6K)
504
2 Error Alarm Enables/disables the control call when an unremoved jam occurs. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disabled • 1: Enabled
An “unremoved jam” is a paper jam that remains unremoved for 15 minutes. If 1 is selected, the machine beeps if an unremoved jam has occurred.
Error Alarm Japan Only 505 1 Error Alarm [0 ∼ 255 / 40 / 1 /step]
Supply Alarm Japan Only 1 Paper Supply Alarm 2 Staple Supply Alarm 3 Toner Supply Alarm
Turns the supply alarm on or off. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Off • 1: On
128 Interval: Others 132 Interval: A3 133 Interval: A4 134 Interval: A5 141 Interval: B4 142 Interval: B5 160 Interval: DLT 164 Interval: LG 166 Interval: LT
507
172 Interval: HLT
The machine issues the control call when the number of paper sheets reaches the specified value. [00250 ∼ 10000 / 1000 / 1 sheet/step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-37
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
CC call Japan Only 1 CC201 ON/OFF
(Remain of Jam) Enables/disables alarms for unremoved jams. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disabled • 1: Enabled
2 CC101 ON/OFF (Continuous jam Occurrence)
Enables/disables alarms for consecutive jams. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disabled • 1: Enabled
3 CC202 ON/OFF (Continuous Door Open)
Enables/disables alarms when a cover remains open continuously. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disabled • 1: Enabled
4 CC Call Screening ON/OFF (Low Call Mode)
Selects the alarm mode. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Normal Mode (CC Auto Call) • 1: Reduce Mode (CC Manual Call)
When selecting 1 (reduce mode), SP5-508-011 through -023 specify parameters (referred to as “P” in the following descriptions). Alarms occur under the following conditions: • Continuous jam:
When paper jams occur P times consecutively, where P can be between 2 and 10. The default for P is 5 (☛ SP5-508-012).
• Continuous door open: When a door is left open for P minutes, where P can be between 3 and 30. The default for P is 10 (☛ SP5-508-013).
• Unremoved jam: When a paper jam is left unremoved for P minutes, where P can be between 3 and 30. The default for P is 10 (☛ SP5-508-011).
11 CC201 Interval (Jam Detection: Time Length)
Specifies the unremoved jam timer (☛ SP5-508-004). [3 ∼ 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
12 CC101 Frequency (Jam Detection: Time Length)
Specifies the number of consecutive jams (☛ SP5-508-004). [2 ∼ 10 / 5 / 1 time/step]
13 CC202 Interval (Door Open: Time Length)
Specifies the continuous door open timer (☛ SP5-508-004). [3 ∼ 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
508
21 CC201 Beeper Ope (Jam Operation: Time Length)
Selects how the machine handles the unremoved jam alarm. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Auto call • 1: Beeper
If an unremoved jam occurs, a phone call is automatically made when 0 (auto call) is selected. To enable SP5-508-21 through -23, SP5-508-4 must be set to 1.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-38
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
22 CC101 Manual Call ON/OFF (Jam Operation: Time Length)
Selects how the machine handles the consecutive jam alarm. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Auto call • 1: Manual Call
508
23 CC202 Manual Call ON/OFF (Door Operation: Time Length)
Selects how the machine handles the continuous door open alarm. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Auto call • 1: Manual Call
ACC Factory Setting 4 Recall Recalls the ACC factory settings. 5 Overwrite Overwrites the ACC factory settings with the current
settings.
610
6 Previous Setting Recalls the previous ACC settings. 2nd. Single Color Adj.
1 B–C [0 ∼ 100 / 90 / 1 %/step] 2 B–M [0 ∼ 100 / 60 / 1 %/step] 3 G–C [0 ∼ 100 / 85 / 1 %/step] 4 G–Y [0 ∼ 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] 5 R–M [0 ∼ 100 / 95 / 1 %/step]
611
6 R–Y [0 ∼ 100 / 65 / 1 %/step] Memory Clear – Refer to section 5.1.9 for how to use this SP
1 All modules Clears the settings from the NVRAM and initializes the settings. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2 Engine Clear Clears the engine settings. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 SCS/SRM Clears the system settings. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4 IMH Memory Clear Clears IMH data. DFU [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5 MCS Clears MCS data. DFU [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0/step] • 0: Does not execute • 1: Executes
6 Copier application Clears the copy settings. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7 Fax application Clears the fax settings. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 Printer application Clears the user tool settings. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9 Scanner application Clears the scanner settings. This SP must be performed after installing the printer/scanner option or updating the scanner software. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
10 Network application Clears the net file settings. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
801
11 NCS Clears the network settings. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-39
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
12 IPU Clears the IPU settings. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
14 DCS Memory Clear Clears the DCS settings. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
801
15 UCS Memory Clear Clears the UCS settings. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Free Run 1 A4: BANK 2: Bk 2 A4: TRAY 1: Bk 3 A4: By-pass: Bk 4 A4: BANK 2: Full Color
802
5 All Mode
Makes a free run test. All mode: Goes through tests 1 to 4. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] • 0: No free run 1: Start a free run test
803 Input Check (See section 5.1.4, “Input Check”) 804 Output Check (See section 5.1.5, “Output Check”.)
SC Reset 810 1 SC Reset Resets a fusing-related SC.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] Resets a type A service call condition. NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after using this SP.
Serial Number Display 811 2 Serial Number Display Displays the machine serial number.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] Service Telephone No. Setting
1 Telephone 2 Facsimile 3 Supply
812*
4 Operation
5-812-1: Service representative telephone number 5-812-2: Service representative fax number 5-812-3: Number for ordering consumables 5-812-4: Telephone number of the sales representative [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0/step] • Both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input.
High Voltage SC Sensor 813* 1 High Voltage SC
Sensor Activates/deactivates detection of SC conditions for the high voltage power supplies. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1/step] • 0: Activated • 1: Deactivated • The following SCs are affected: SC300, 301, 302,
350, 351, 400, 410, 411, 412, 413, 420, 421, 430 CSS Function DFU
1 Function Setting [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Off • 1: On
816
2 CE Call CSS-PI Device Code DFU 821
1 CSS-PI device code Selects the PI device code. [0 ∼ 4 / 0 / 1 /step] To validate the setting, turn off and on the main power switch.
Document All Clear 822 1 Document All Clear Clears the management information on stored fax files.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-40
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
NVRAM Data Upload 824 1 NVRAM Data Upload Use this to copy NVRAM data from the machine to a
flash card. NVRAM Data Download 825
1 NVRAM Data Download
Imports data from a flash card to the NVRAM.
When data has been normally imported into the NVRAM, a message appears on the operation panel. After reading the message, turn the main power switch off and on. The data of SP7-007 are not imported through SP5-825.
Network Setting 74 Delete Password Deletes the password. 75 DNS Server From
DHCP [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
76 DNS Server 1 Server address 77 DNS Server 2 Server address 78 DNS Server 3 Server address 79 Domain Name
(Ethernet) Domain name
828
80 Host Name (Ethernet) Host name HDD
1 HDD Formatting (ALL) 2 HDD Formatting (IMH) 3 HDD Formatting
(Thumbnail) 4 HDD Formatting (Job
Log) 5 HDD Formatting
(Printer Fonts) 6 HDD Formatting (User
Info 1) 7 HDD Formatting (User
Info 2) 8 HDD Formatting
(Scanner Mail) 9 HDD Formatting (Data
for a Design)
832
11 HDD Formatting (Ridoc interface)
Initializes the hard disk. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step] • Use this SP mode only for hard disk error recovery.
Job Log Transfer 833* 7 Job Log Transfer Saves the results of jobs in the job log.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • If this mode is enabled, the results of jobs are written
on the HDD. • 0: Disabled • 1: Enabled
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-41
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
File Transfer 1 Capture server IP
address Displays/specifies the capture server IP address. [00000000000h ∼ FFFFFFFFFFF1 / 0 / 1 /step]
10 Archive: Copier 11 Archive: Fax Send 12 Archive: Fax: Receive 13 Archive: Printer
835
14 Archive: Scanner
Validates/invalidates auto-store functions. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Invalidates • 1: Validates
20 Server: Copier 21 Server: Fax Send 22 Server Transfer: Fax:
Receive 23 Server: Printer 24 Server: Scanner
Transfers or does not transfer data to servers. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Not transferred • 1: Transferred
30 List File: Copier 31 List File: Fax: Send 32 List File: Fax: Receive 33 List File: Printer
835
34 List File: Scanner
Selects lists or files. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Lists • 1: Files
Capture Setting 1 Function setting Validates/invalidates the capture function.
[0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Invalidates • 1: Validates
2 Panel Setting Displays or does not display the capture function buttons. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Displayed • 1: Not displayed
51 Cancel Document Cancels the documents waiting for capturing.
836
61 Capture Transfer Allows/disallows captured documents to be transferred. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Machine transfers captured files to the server • 1: Machine transfers captured files to the server twice
(the second overwrites the first) IEEE1394
4 Device Name Displays the 1394 device name. [Text up to 13 bytes / NULL / – /step]
7 Cycle Master Validates/invalidates the cycle master function. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Invalidates • 1: Validates
8 BCR mode Select either ‘Standard’, 'IRM color copy', or 'Always effective'.
9 IRM 1394a Check [bit 0 ∼ bit 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • bit 0: off • bit 1: on
839
10 Unique ID [bit 0 ∼ bit 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • bit 0: off • bit 1: on
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-42
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
11 Logout Prevents initiators from logging on or makes initiators log off. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Prevents the initiators (having already logged on) to
log on if they try to log on • 1: Makes initiators (having already logged on) to log
off if they try to log on 12 Login Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log on.
[0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Disallows • 1: Allows
839
13 Login MAX Specifies the maximum initiators able to log on. [0 ∼ 63 / 8 / 1 /step]
IEEE 802.11b 6 Channel MAX Specifies the maximum number of IEEE 802.11b
channels. North America: [1 ∼ 14 / 11 / 1 /step] Europe: [1 ∼ 14 / 13 / 1 /step]
7 Channel MIN Specifies the minimum number of IEEE 802.11b channels. [1 ∼ 14 / 1 / 1 /step]
840
11 WEP Key Select Selects the WEP key. [00, 01, 10, 11 / 00 / – /step] • 00: 1st key • 01: 2nd key • 10: 3rd key • 11: 4th key
Toner Name Setting 1 Black 2 Cyan 3 Yellow
841
4 Magenta
Specifies supply names. These appear on the screen when the user presses the Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
Net File Analysis Mode Setting 842 1 Net File Analysis Mode
Setting DFU Default: 00111111 – do not change Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Input Check (Controller) 843 1 Input Check
(Controller) [0x00 ∼ 0x07 / – / 1 /step] DFU Default: 00000001 – do not change
Delivery Server 1 FTP Port No. Specifies the FTP port number.
[0 ∼ 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step] 2 IP address Specifies the distribution server IP address.
[0 ∼ 0xfffffff / 0x00 / – /step] 3 Retry Timer Specifies the distribution retry time.
[60 ∼ 900 / 300 / 1 /step] 4 Retry Times Specifies the distribution retry count.
[0 ∼ 99 / 3 / 1 /step]
845
5 IP (Capture Server) Specifies the distribution server address. [0 ∼ 0xffffffff / 0x00 / 1 /step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-43
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
6 Error Display Time Specifies the display time of the distribution error. [0 ∼ 999 / 300 / 1 /step]
845
7 Delivery Option Selects the distribution option. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Data goes directly to the connected PC • 1: Data goes to the Scan Router server
UCS 1 Machine ID (Delivery
Server) Specifies the machine ID of the distribution server.
2 Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server)
Clears the machine ID of the distribution server.
3 Max Entry Specifies the maximum entry count. [2000 ∼ 5000 / 2000 / 1 /step]
4 Delivery Server Model Selects the distribution server model. [0 ∼ 4 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Unknown • 1: SG1 (distributed with the copier) • 2: SG1 (distributed as a package) • 3: SG2 (distributed with the copier) • 4: SG2 (distributed as a package)
5 Delivery Server Capability
Specifies the distribution capability. [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 2 /step]
6 Delivery Server Retry Timer
[0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
846
50 All Directory Clear Initializes all directories. NFA page-Magnification
1 Copy: Color Selects the net file page magnification (copy, color) [0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step] Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
2 Copy: B & W Letter Selects the net file page magnification (copy, black & white, text) [0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
3 Copy B & W Selects the net file page magnification (copy, black & white, others) [0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
4 Printer Color Selects the net file page magnification (printer, color) [0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
5 Printer GW (1 bit) Selects the net file page magnification (printer, black & white [0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
847
6 Printer GW (2 bit) Selects the net file page magnification (printer, black & white) [0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
JPEG Quality Setting 848 1 JPEG Quality Setting This is for Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document
server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software [5 ∼ 95 / 50 / 2 /step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-44
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Counter Clear Day 1 Indication Displays the date when the electrical counter was reset
to zero.
849
2 Display of Counter Clear Day
Allows or does not allow printing the counter clear day on the user counter list. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Printed • 1: Not printed
Address Book Function 1 Switch Module Selects which module is responsible for user information
management. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] DFU • 0: SCS • 1: UCS Having changed the setting, turn the main switch off and on to validate it.
850
2 Select Title Selects the address book index style. [2 ∼ 4 / 2 / 1 /step] • 2: Style 1 • 3: Style 2 • 4: Style 3
SMTP 1 Server Name
852
2 Port Number [0 ∼ 65535 / 25 / 1 /step] Plug and Play 907
1 Plug and Play Specifies the Plug and Play setting. [0 ~ 11 / 0 / 1 /step] Select the required setting from the menu.
Switchover Permission Time 1 Indication Application Specifies the switching time from the default application
to another application. [3 ∼ 30 / 3 / 1 /step] The value indicates how long the next application waits before being given control by the default application.
913
2 Print Application Specifies the switching time from one application to another. [3 ∼ 30 / 3 / 1 /step] The value indicates how long the next application waits before being given control by the running application.
Counter Display 914 Allows/does not allow applications to display their
counters. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Allows • 1: Does not allow
ACS Mode 919 1 ACS Mode Selects the ACS mode. DFU
[0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Standard mode • 1: High performance mode
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-45
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
CSV Password Check 954 1 CSV Password Check CSV: Copy server (document server)
When a document is stored with a password on the copy server, and this document is selected later at the operation panel, this SP determines whether the password is displayed or greyed out. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Test Pattern 1 Pattern [0 ∼ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
See section 5.1.3. for how to use.
955
2 Density [0 ∼ 255 / 255 / 1 /step] Document Clear Time 966
1 Document Clear Time Specifies how many days the document server stores files. [0 ∼ 180 / 3 / 1 /step]
Debug Serial 970 1 Debug Serial DFU
Touch Panel Correction 971 1 Touch Panel
Correction Displays if the operation panel has been calibrated after an SP5-801 execution. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Not calibrated • 1: Calibrated
Cherry Server Setting 974 Cherry Server Setting Selects the Scan Router server light or full version.
[0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Light version • 1: Professional version
Loop Back Test 1 Duplex 2 Bank 3 Exit Option 4 ARDF 5 Interchange Unit 6 By-pass Tray
989
7 1 Bin Tray
Executes a loop back test. [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Does not execute • 1: Executes
SMC Print 1 All (Data List) 2 SP (Mode Data List) 3 User Program 4 Logging Data 5 Diagnosis Report 6 Non-Default 7 NIB Summary
(Configuration page, system log page NVRAM log page)
990*
8 Net File Log
[0 ~ 0xff / 0x00 / 0 /step] Prints SP setting data. [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 0 /step] • SP all print: All items printed out with SP5-990-2, 3, 4,
6, and 7. • All: All SP mode settings • Non-Default: SP settings that have been changed
from the defaults
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-46
5 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
21 Copier UP Data (Copy Management Report)
22 Scanner SP
990*
23 Scanner UP (Scanner Management Report)
[0 ~ 0xff / 0x00 / 0 /step] Prints SP setting data. [0 ~ 255 / 0 / 0 /step] • SP all print: All items printed out with SP5-990-2, 3, 4,
6, and 7. • All: All SP mode settings • Non-Default: SP settings that have been changed
from the defaults Density Adjustment
1 Bk 2 Y 3 M
996
4 C
Adjusts the density. [–3 ∼ 3 / 0 / 1 /step] –3: Image becomes lighter 3: Image becomes darker This setting changes the development bias and charge corona voltage to adjust the image density.
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-47
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
SP6-XXX: (Peripherals)
6 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
ADF Adjustment 1 S-to-S Registration Adjusts the side-to-side registration of the optional ADF.
[–5.0 ∼ 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] The main scan registration of the ADF cannot be adjusted. Adjust the copier registration if necessary.
2 Leading Edge Registration
Adjusts the sub-scan registration of the optional ADF. [–5.0 ∼ 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
3 Trailing Edge Erase Adjusts the trail edge erase of the optional ADF. [–5.0 ∼ 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4 S-to-S Registration (Rear)
Adjusts the rear-side side-to-side registration of the optional ADF. [–5.0 ∼ 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] The main scan registration of the ADF cannot be adjusted. Adjust the copier registration if necessary.
5 Sub-san Magnification Adjusts the sub-scan magnification of the optional ADF. [–5.0 ∼ 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
6 Orig. Buckling Enables/disables original buckling during rear side scanning. Disable if the customer is scanning fragile originals. [0 ∼ 1 / 1 / 1 /step] • 0: Disabled • 1: Enabled
006*
7 Buckle Adjustment Adjusts original buckling for rear side scanning. [–5.0 ∼ 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
DF Input Check 1 Original Set 2 Original Width 1 3 Original Width 2 4 Original Length 1 5 Original Length 2 6 Orig. Trailing Edge 7 Cover Open 8 DF Position 9 Registration 10 Original Exit
007
11 Original Reverse
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the ARDF. See section 5.1.4 Do not check another item before the result is returned.
DF Output Check 1 Feed Motor (Forward) 2 Feed Motor (Reverse) 3 Trans. Motor
(Forward) 4 Feed Clutch 5 Pick-up Solenoid 6 Junction Gate
Solenoid
008
7 Stamp Solenoid
Switches on each electrical component of the ARDF for testing. See section 5.1.5 Do not start to check another item before ending the test that is in progress.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-48
6 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
ADF Free Run 009 1 ADF Free Run Executes an ADF free run.
[0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: End • 1: Start
ADF Stamp Position 010 1 ADF Stamp Position Adjusts the stamp position of the optional ADF.
[–5.0 ∼ 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] ADF Size Change 016
1 ADF Size Change Selects the paper size detected by the optional ADF original sensors. North America: [0 ∼ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] Others: [0 ∼ 2 / 0 / 1 /step] • 0: Regular • 1: A4/LT • 2: 8K/16K Number 2, “8K/16K”, is valid for the models of the following regions: Europe, Asia. When number 2 is selected, the following paper sizes are not detected: A3, B4, A4, B5.
Staple Position 050 1 Staple Position Adjusts the staple position of the optional finisher.
[–3.5 ∼ 3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm/step] Finisher Input Check
1 Entrance 2 Tray Exit 4 Staple Entrance 5 Stapler Home Position 6 Jogger Fence Home
Position 8 Feed-out Belt Home
Position 9 Stapler Tray Paper 10 Stapler Rotation Home
Position 11 Staple 14 Staple Sheet 17 Exit Plate Home
Position 18 Tray Shift Home
Position 21 Stack Height 23 Tray Lower Limit 35 Paper Limit 101 500 Fin Entrance 102 500 Fin Exit 103 500 Fin Jogger Home
Position 104 500 Fin Top Cover 105 500 Fin Height
117
106 500 Fin Lever
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches in the finisher. See section 5.1.4
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-49
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
6 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
107 500 Fin Upper Limit 108 500 Fin Near Limit 109 500 Fin Staple Cover 110 500 Fin Stapler Home
Position 111 500 Fin Staple End 112 500 Fin Staple
117
113 500 Fin Stapler Lock
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches in the finisher. See section 5.1.4
Output Check 1 Fin All Off 2 Upper Transfer Motor 3 Lower Transfer Motor 4 Exit Motor 5 Tray Gate Sol 6 Tray Lift Motor 7 Jogger Motor 12 Stapler Motor 13 Staple Hummer 15 Stapler Gate Sol 16 Pos. Roller Sol 18 Feed-out Motor 19 Shift Motor 22 Guide Plate Motor 23 Fin Free Run 1 24 Fin Free Run 2 101 500 Fin All Off 102 500 Fin Main Motor 103 500 Fin Jogger Motor 104 500 Fin Paddle Sol 105 500 Fin Gear Sol 106 500 Fin Lever Sol 107 500 Fin Tray Motor 108 500 Fin Stapler Motor 109 500 Fin Free Run 1
118
110 500 Fin Free Run 2
Switches on each electrical component of the finisher. See section 5.1.5
ADF Read Position Adjustment 990 1 ADF Read Position
Adjustment Adjusts the reading position of the ADF. Moves the scanner under the glass to a different position. Use this if there is a scratch on the glass. [–10 ∼ 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-50
SP7-XXX: (Data Log)
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Operation Time 001* 1 Operation Time Displays the main motor operation time.
[0000000 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 minute/step] Logging this operation time helps identify the cause of a difficulty by analyzing the correlation between the printing count and the OPC-belt operation time.
Original Counter 1 Total Counter 2 Copier 3 Fax 4 Document Box 5 Scanner
002
6 Others
Displays the original counters. [0000000 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Print Counter 1 Total 2 Copy: Black 4 Copy: Full Color 5 FAX: Black 6 FAX: Single Color 7 Print: Black 8 Print: Full Color
Displays the color counters. [–9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
10 Development: CMY 11 Development: K 12 CPY: Single Color 13 CPY: Twin Color
• 10, 11: These SP modes are development counters.
20 Total Full color 21 Total B/W Single Color 22 Total Single Color 23 Total B/W 24 Copy: Full Color 25 Print: Full Color 26 Copy: Color 27 Copy: B/W
• These SP modes are used for the Japanese market only.
28 Print: Color (except for B/W)
29 Print: B/W
003*
30 Total: Color
• These SP modes are print counters. • These SP modes are used in all markets.
Other Counter 1 Duplex 2 A3/DLT
007*
3 Staple
Displays other counter values. [–9999 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step]
Paper Size Counter 4 A3 5 A4 6 A5 13 B4 14 B5
101*
32 DLT (11" x 17")
Displays the counter values for each paper size. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-51
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
36 LG (81/2" x 14") 38 LT (81/2" x 11") 44 HLT (51/2" x 81/2") 47 12 x 18
101*
128 Other
Displays the counter values for each paper size. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step]
Paper type Counter 1 Normal 2 Recycled 3 Special 4 Color 5 Letter head 6 Label 7 Thick 8 OHP
105
9 Others
Displays the output counter for each paper type. [0 ∼ 999999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Waste Toner Full 1 OPC Displays the waste toner bottle counters.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
106*
2 Belt [0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 /step] Total Scan Counter 201
1 Total Scan Counter Paper Tray Counter
1 Tray 1 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 4 Tray 4 5 Bypass Tray
204*
6 Duplex
Displays the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 sheet/step]
ADF Total Counter 205 1 ADF Total Counter Displays the ARDF original count.
[0000000 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Staple Counter 206
1 Staple Counter Displays the stapling count. [0000000 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Punch Counter 209 1 Punch Counter Displays the punching count.
[0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Copy Counter: Magnification
1 Reduce 25% <-->49 % 2 Reduce 50% <-->99 % 3 Full Size 4 Enlarge 101% <-->
200% 5 Enlarge 201% <-->
400% 6 Direct Magnification 7 Direct Size
Magnification mm (inch)
301
8 Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Displays the copy count for each magnification ratio. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-52
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Copy Counter: Copy Mode 1 Text 2 T/P (Glossy Photo) 3 T/P (Printed Photo) 4 T/P (Copied Photo) 5 Photo (Glossy Photo) 6 Photo (Printed Photo) 7 Photo (Copied Photo) 8 Generation Copy 9 Pale 10 Map 12 Repeat 13 Sort 14 Staple 15 Series 16 Erase 17 Duplex 18 ADF 19 Double Copy 20 Duplex Original 21 Interrupt Copy 22 Combine 1 Side 23 Combine 2 Side 26 Batch 27 SADF 28 Mixed Sizes 29 Stamp 30 Cover Page 31 Chapter Page 32 Color Balance
Adjustment 33 Adjust Color 34 Copy Quality 35 Erase Color 36 Convert Color
304
37 Color Background
Displays the copy count for each mode. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Copy Counter–Set number 1 1 to 1 2 1 to 2<-->5 3 1 to 6<-->10 4 1 to 11<-->20 5 1 to 21<-->50 6 1 to 51<-->100 7 1 to 101<-->300
305
8 1 to 301<-->over
Displays the multi-page job copy counters. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Job Counter–Copy Mode 1 Sort 2 Staple 4 Reserve Copy
306
5 Check Copy
Displays the job count for each mode. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-53
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Document Server–Scan Counter 320 1 Document Server–
Scan Counter Displays the number of pages scanned into the document server. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Document Server–Original Size 4 A3 5 A4 6 A5 13 B4 14 B5 32 DLT 36 LG 38 LT 44 HLT
321
128 Others
Displays the original count for each paper size when using the document server. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Document Server–Print Size 5 A4 (sideways) 6 A5 (sideways) 14 B5 (sideways) 38 LT (sideways) 44 HLT (sideways) 128 Other 132 A3 (lengthwise) 133 A4 (lengthwise) 134 A5 (lengthwise) 141 B4 (lengthwise) 142 B5 (lengthwise) 160 DLT (lengthwise) 164 LG (lengthwise) 166 HT (lengthwise)
323
172 HLT (lengthwise)
Displays the document server printing count for each paper size. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Document Server–Print Job Counter 1 Duplex 2 Sort 3 Staple 5 Check Copy
324
6 Print 1st Page
Displays the document server printing job count for each mode. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Document Server–Job Count (Page No) 1 1-page 2 2-page 3 3<-->5 page 4 6<-->10 page
325
5 over 11 pages
Displays document server printing job counts for multi-page jobs.
Document Server–Job Count (File No) 1 1 file 2 2<-->5 files 3 6<-->10 files
326
4 over 11 files
Displays document server printing job counts classified by mode. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-54
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Document Server–Job Count (Set No) 1 1 to 1 2 1 to 2<-->5 3 1 to 6<-->10 4 1 to 11<-->20 5 1 to 21<-->50 6 1 to 51<-->100 7 1 to 101<-->300
327
8 1 to 301<-->over
Displays document server printing job counts classified by number of outputs. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Document Server–Job Count (Print Mode) 8 Sort 9 Staple 12 Duplex 24 Stamp 25 Cover Page
328
26 Slip Sheet
Displays document server printing count classified by mode. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Total SC Counter 401* 1 SC Counter Displays how many times SC codes have been output.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 time/step] Latest 10 SC Log
1 Latest 2 Latest 1 3 Latest 2 4 Latest 3 5 Latest 4 6 Latest 5 7 Latest 6 8 Latest 7 9 Latest 8
403
10 Latest 9
Displays the latest ten SC codes.
Paper Jam Counter 502* 1 Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of jams detected.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step] Original Jam Counter 503
1 Original Jam Counter Displays the total original jam count. [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
Jam by Location 1 At Power On 3 Tray 1: ON Displays the number of jams according to the location
where they were detected. [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0 /step]
4 Tray 2: Non Feed 5 Tray 3: Non Feed 6 Tray 4: Non Feed 7 Bypass: Non Feed 8 1st Relay ON 9 2nd Relay: ON 10 3rd Relay: ON
504*
12 Registration (From Tray)
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-55
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
13 Registration (From Duplex)
14 Duplex Exit 15 Interchange Exit:: ON 16 Paper Exit: On 17 Bridge Exit: On 18 Bridge Relay: On 19 Duplex Entrance 1: On 20 Duplex Entrance 2: On 23 Duplex Exit: On 40 Finisher Entrance: On 41 Finisher Exit: On 58 1st Relay: Off 59 2nd Relay: Off 60 3rd Relay: Off 61 4th Relay: Off 63 Registration: Off 64 Fusing Exit 65 Interchange Exit: Off 66 Paper Exit: Off 67 Bridge Exit: Off 68 Bridge Relay: Off 69 Duplex Entrance 1: Off 70 Duplex Entrance 2: Off 73 Duplex Exit: Off 100 Finisher Entrance: Off 101 Finisher Exit: Off 103 Finisher Staple 104 Finisher Stack Feed-
out
105 Finisher Paper Taking out
107 Finisher Drive Error 108 Finisher Tray Lift Error 109 Finisher Jogger Error 110 Finisher Tray Shift
Error
111 Finisher Stapler Error 112 Finisher Stack Feed-
out
114 Finisher Feed out Error
504*
115 Finisher No Response Original Tray by Location
5 Registration Sensor (On Check)
6 Relay Sensor (On Check)
Relay Sensor = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9)
505
7 Inverter Sensor (On Check)
Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10)
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-56
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
55 Registration Sensor (Off Check)
56 Relay Sensor (Off Check)
Relay Sensor = Original Trailing Edge Sensor (S9)
505
57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check)
Inverter Sensor = Original Reverse Sensor (S10)
Jam by Paper Size 4 A3 Displays the number of jams according to paper size.
[0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1 /step] 5 A4 6 A5 13 B4 14 B5 32 DLT 36 LG 38 LT 44 HLT 47 12" x 18"
506*
128 Other Copy Jam History
1 Latest 2 Latest 1 3 Latest 2 4 Latest 3 5 Latest 4 6 Latest 5 7 Latest 6 8 Latest 7 9 Latest 8
507*
10 Latest 9
Displays the latest 10 paper jams. The information contains the following four lines: • Location code (☛ SP7-504) • Paper size (in the ASAP code) • Total counter (as of the jam) • Date
Original Jam History 1 Latest 2 Latest 1 3 Latest 2 4 Latest 3 5 Latest 4 6 Latest 5 7 Latest 6 8 Latest 7 9 Latest 8
508
10 Latest 9
Displays the logs of the latest 10 original jams. The logs are composed of the following four lines: • Location code (☛ SP7-505) • Paper size (in the ASAP code) • Total counter (as of the jam) • Date
Firmware Version 801 Displays the firmware versions and part numbers if
available. PM Counter
1 Number of Development
2 PCU 3 Development: M
803*
4 Development: C
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current unit. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] • For clearing the counters, see SP7-804.
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-57
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
5 Development: Y 6 Development: Bk 7 Fusing Unit 8 Charger 9 Waste Toner: OPC 10 Waste Toner: Belt 11 Oil 12 Filter 1 13 Filter 2 14 Bank 1 Feed 15 Bank 2 Feed 16 Bank 3 Feed 17 Bank 4 Feed 18 Manual Feed 19 Paper transfer unit
803*
20 ADF
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current unit. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] For clearing the counters, see SP7-804.
PM Counter Reset 1 Number of
Development 2 PCU 3 Development: M 4 Development: C 5 Development: Y 6 Development: Bk 7 Fusing Unit 8 Charger 9 Waste Toner: OPC 10 Waste Toner: Belt 11 Oil 12 Filter 1 13 Filter 2 14 Tray 1 Roller 15 Tray 2 Roller 16 Tray 3 Roller 17 Tray 4 Roller 18 By-pass Feed 19 Paper Transfer Unit 20 ADF
804
100 All
Clears the PM counters. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step] • For displaying the counter, see SP7-803.
SC JAM Counter Clear 807 1 SC Jam Counter Clear Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper
jams. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step]
Counter All Clear (except total) 808 1 Counter All Clear
(except total) Clears all counters except for SP7-003 and –007. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step]
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-58
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Access code clear 810 1 Access code clear Clears the key operator password.
SP7-810 clears the key operator password. After clearing this code, stored data can be accessed without using it.
To register a new key operator password, use SP5-409-1.
Original Counter Clear 811 1 Original Counter Clear Clears the original counter.
Tray Counter Clear 1 Tray 1 Clears the tray counters (SP7-204).
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 4 Tray 4 5 Bypass Tray
816
6 Tray Duplex Memory Clear 822
1 Copy Cunter: Magnification Clear
Clears the copy counter (classified by magnification)
Electrical Counter Reset 825 1 Electrical Counter
Reset Sets the total counter to “0”. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step]
MF Error Counter 1 Error Total
826
2 Error Staple Displays the MF error counters.
MF Error Counter Clear 827 1 MF Error Counter
Clear Clears the MF error counter.
Diagnostic result 832* 1 Diagnostic Result Displays the result of the diagnostics. Refer to section
4.2 for the error codes. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step]
Coverage 1 Last: M 2 Last: C 3 Last: Y 4 Last: Bk 5 Average: M 6 Average: C 7 Average: Y
833
8 Average: Bk
Displays coverage ratios. [0.00 ~ 100.0 / 0.00 / 0.01 %step] This SP mode displays the “coverage ratio” of the output, i.e. the ratio of the total pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper.
Do not use this counter for billing purposes. This is because this value is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of course it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: the type, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration and developer potential. Last: This is the coverage for the previous sheet. Average: This is the average coverage for each sheet.
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-59
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Toner Consume 5 M 6 C 7 Y
834
8 Bk
Displays the coverage ratios, including toner revitalization mode. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] This displays the average coverage ratio, including toner consumed during printing and toner consumed during toner revitalization mode (SP3-971). Do not use this counter for billing purposes.
ACC Counter 1 M 2 Y 3 C
835
4 Bk
Displays the number of times ACC has been done. [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Total Memory Size 836 1 Total Memory Size Displays the memory capacity.
Memory Clear 837 1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-304 counter (copy count classified by
mode). Memory Clear 838
1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-305 counter (job count classified by output count).
Memory Clear 839 1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-306 counter (job count classified by job
count). Memory Clear 840
1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-320 counter (document box count). Memory Clear 841
1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-321 counter (original count classified by paper size).
Memory Clear 842 1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-323 counter (print count classified by
paper size). Memory Clear 843
1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-324 counter. Memory Clear 844
1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-325 counter. Memory Clear 845
1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-326 counter. Memory Clear 846
1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-327 counter. Memory Clear 847
1 Memory Clear Clears the SP7-328 counter. Memory Clear 848
1 Memory Clear Clears all the document server counters, which include: • SP7-301 • SP7-304 • SP7-305 • SP7-306 • SP7-320 • SP7-321 • SP7-323 • SP7-324 • SP7-325 • SP7-326 • SP7-327 • SP7-328
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-60
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
High Duty Counter 1 M 2 C 3 Y
850
4 Bk
Used for the toner revitalization process (SP3-971). Counts the number of developments made during the past 12 hours.
Assert Information (Assert Information) 1 File Name 2 # of Lines
Records the location where the last problem (SC990) was detected in the program. The data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis. [0 ~ 0 / 0 / 0 /step]
901
3 Location Waste Toner Full Clear
1 OPC 2 Belt
904
100 All
Clears the waste toner bottle full counters. [0 ~ 1 / 0 / 0 /step] • 0: Not clears • 1: Clears
PM Counter-Previous 1 PCU 2 Development: M 3 Development: C 4 Development: Y 5 Development: Bk 6 Fusing Unit 7 Charger 8 Waste Toner: OPC 9 Waste Toner: Belt 10 Oil 11 Filter 1 12 Filter 2 13 Tray 1 Roller 14 Tray 2 Roller 15 Tray 3 Roller 16 Tray 4 Roller 17 By-pass Feed 18 Paper Transfer Unit
906*
19 ADF
Displays the previous PM counters. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 0 /step]
Replace counter 1 PCU 2 Development: M 3 Development: C 4 Development: Y 5 Development: Bk 6 Fusing Unit 7 Charger 8 Waste Toner: OPC 9 Waste Toner: Belt 10 Oil 11 Filter 1 12 Filter 2
907
13 Tray 1 Roller
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
26 July 2002 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5-61
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
14 Tray 2 Roller 15 Tray 3 Roller 16 Tray 4 Roller 17 By-pass Feed 18 Paper Transfer Unit 19 Toner: M 20 Toner: C 21 Toner: Y 22 Toner: Bk
907
23 ADF
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Process Control Counter 908 1 Process Control
Counter Displays the process control counter. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Process Control Reset 909 1 Process Control Reset Resets the process control counter.
Oil Counter 913 1 Oil Counter Displays the oil supply unit counter.
[0 ~ 65535 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] Oil Clean Counter Reset 914
1 Oil Clean Counter Reset
Resets the oil cleaner counter.
Process Error Log 1 Log 1 2 Log 2
915
3 Log 3
Displays the latest three process control error logs. The following are the error codes:
Development unit initial settings errors: • 110: Incorrect image detected by cyan ID sensor • 116: Incorrect image detected by magenta ID
sensor • 118: No black image
Development bias settings errors: • 113: Incorrect image detected by cyan ID sensor • 114: Incorrect image detected by magenta ID
sensor • 115: Incorrect image detected by yellow ID sensor • 123: Incorrect image detected by black ID sensor
ID sensor errors: • 103: ID sensor error • 104: ID sensor unable to detect image • 105: OPC belt not detected
Machine Counter 920 1 Machine Counter [0 ~ 0xFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 /step]
Machine Counter Clear 921 1 Machine Counter
Clear Clears the machine counter.
Toner End Counter 1 K Toner 2 C Toner 3 M Toner
922
4 Y Toner
Displays the toner end counter, which indicates the possible print count after a toner near end.
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 26 July 2002
5-62
7 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Toner End Counter Clear 1 K Toner 2 C Toner 3 M Toner 4 Y Toner
923
100 All
Clears the toner end counter (SP7-922).
The machine goes back to the normal operation mode if the toner end counter is cleared.
Charger Clean Counter 924 1 Charger Clean
Counter Displays how many times the charge corona wire has been cleaned. [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] SP7-926 resets the counter.
Time Counter Display 925 1 Time Counter Display Displays the current counter of the charge corona unit
cleaning interval. SP2-801 specifies the charge corona unit cleaning interval.
Charger Cleaner Counter Reset 926 1 Charger Cleaner
Counter Reset Resets the charge wire cleaner counter (SP7-924).
Timer Counter Clear 927 1 Clears the counter of the charge corona unit cleaning
interval. SP7-927 clears the counter displayed by SP7-925, but does not clear the value specified with SP2-801.
Previous PM Counter Clear 928 1 Previous PM Counter
Clear Clears the previous PM counter (SP7-906).
Replace Counter Clear 929 1 Replace Counter Clear Clears the replace counter.
Counter For Designer 1 Counter 1 For
Designer
930
2 Counter 2 For Designer
DFU
SP9-XXX: (Etc.)
9 Mode No. (Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]
Discharge Threshold 904 1 Discharge Threshold [90 ~ 220 / 150 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
26 July 2002 DUMMY
5-63
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5.1.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP5-955-1)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-955-1. 2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press !. (See
the tables below.) 3. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for
the test print (paper size, etc.) 4. Press Start " to start the test print. 5. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern
0 None 23 1 dot Grid Pattern (Reverse order of LD1/2 on)
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 24 3 lines Grayscale 2 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 25 Horizontal Grayscale � 1 3 Vertical Line (2-dot) 26 Vertical Grayscale � 1 4 Horizontal Line (2 dot) 29 Horizontal Grayscale � 2 5 1 dot Grid Pattern0 � 1 30 Vertical Grayscale � 2 6 1 dot pair Grid Pattern � 1 31 Horizontal Grayscale (600 dpi) 7 Alternating Dot Pattern (1 dot) 32 Vertical Grayscale (600 dpi) 8 Alternating Dot Pattern (2 dot) 35 Horizontal Grayscale with White Line � 1 9 Full Dot Pattern 36 Vertical Grayscale with White Line � 1 10 Black band 38 Horizontal Grayscale with White Line � 2 11 Trimming Area (1 dot) 39 Vertical Grayscale with White Line � 2
12 Trimming Area (2 dot) 40 Horizontal Grayscale with White Line (600 dpi)
13 Argyle Pattern (1 dot) 41 Vertical Grayscale with White Line (600 dpi)
14 Argyle Pattern (2 dot) 43 Blank image 15 Horizontal Cross Stitch 50 Vertical Cross Stitch 16 Checker Flag 51 2 beam 19 Alternating Dot Pattern (4 dot) 52 Trimming Area with Crossed Lines
20 1 dot Horizontal Line (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 53 1 dot Grid Pattern � 2
21 1 dot Grid Pattern (Reverse order of LD1/2 on) 54 1 dot pair Grid Pattern � 2
22 1 dot pair Grid Pattern (Reverse order of LD1/2 on)
After finishing your tests, reset SP 5-955-1 to 0.
DUMMY 26 July 2002
5-64
5.1.4 INPUT CHECK
Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5-803. 2. Select an item that you want to check. A small box will be displayed on the SP
mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s. The meaning of the display is as follows.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in the table below.
Reading SP5-803 -XXX Description
0 1 1 Tray 1 Set Tray 1 set (standard tray) Set Not set
2 Tray 1 Paper End Tray 1 paper end sensor (standard tray) Paper End Paper is
present
3 Tray 1 Paper Height
Tray 1 paper near-end sensor (standard tray) Not near end Near end
4 Tray 1 Paper Size Tray 1 paper size sensor (standard tray) (See table 1.)
5 Tray 2 Set Tray 2 set (standard tray) Set Not set
6 Tray 2 Paper End Tray 2 paper end sensor (standard tray) Paper End Paper is
present
7 Tray 2 Paper Height
Tray 2 paper near-end sensor (standard tray) Not near end Near end
8 Tray 2 Paper Size Tray 2 paper size sensor (standard tray)
9 Registration Sensor Detected Not detected 10 Upper Relay Paper feed sensor Detected Not detected 11 Lower Relay Paper feed sensor Detected Not detected 12 Right Cover SW Closed Open 13 Exit Sensor Detected Not detected 14 Paper Overflow Full Not full 15 Exit Cover Switch Closed Open
16 Interchange Unit Set
Set Not set
17 Interchange Exit Detected Not detected 18 By-pass Tray Set Not set Set
19 By-pass Paper End Paper End Paper is present
20 By-pass Paper Size 21 Fusing Unit Set Set Not set
22 Fusing Exit Paper End Paper is present
23 Fusing Oil End
24 Fusing High Temperature
26 July 2002 DUMMY
5-65
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
Reading SP5-803 -XXX Description
0 1
25 Discharge Bias Leak
30 Toner End: M Toner end sensor: M Not end End 31 Toner End: C Toner end sensor: C Not end End 32 Toner End: Y Toner end sensor: Y Not end End 33 Toner End: K Toner end sensor: K Not end End
34 Toner Unit: M Toner cartridge memory chip: M Not set Set
35 Toner Unit: C Toner cartridge memory chip: C Not set Set
36 Toner Unit: Y Toner cartridge memory chip: Y Not set Set
37 Toner Unit: K Toner cartridge memory chip: K Not set Set
38 O/B Waste Toner Sensor
OPC belt waste toner sensor Full Not full
39 O/B Waste Toner Switch
OPC belt waste toner bottle switch Set Not set
40 Belt Mark Belt mark sensor Not detected Detected 41 New PCU Sensor Not used - -
42 T/B Waste Toner Sensor
Transfer belt waste toner sensor Full Not full
43 T/B Waste Toner Switch
Transfer belt waste toner bottle switch Set Not set
44 LD 5V Cover Interlock switch Closed Open 45 Left Cover Closed Open 46 Right Upper Cover Closed Open 47 Front Cover Closed Open
48 Development Motor Lock
Development motor lock Locked Not locked
49 Main Motor Lock Main motor lock Locked Not locked
50 Paper Feed Motor Lock
Paper feed motor lock Locked Not locked
51 Polygon Motor Lock Polygon motor lock Locked Not locked 52 1 Bin Set Set Not set 53 1 Bin Paper Sensor Detected Not detected 60 Duplex Connection Duplex unit Not connected Connected 61 Bank 1 Connection 1st optional paper tray Not connected Connected 62 Bank 2 Connection 2nd optional paper tray Not connected Connected
63 Finisher Connection
Finisher Connection Not connected Connected
64 Bridge Exit Detected Not detected 65 Bridge Relay Detected Not detected 66 Bridge Set Set Not set 67 Bridge Right Cover Closed Open 68 Bridge Left Cover Closed Open
69 Bank Upper Relay Relay Sensor 3 (optional paper tray unit) No paper Paper present
70 Bank Lower Relay Relay Sensor 4 (optional paper tray unit) No paper Paper present
DUMMY 26 July 2002
5-66
Reading SP5-803 -XXX Description
0 1
71 Bank Cover 1 Right cover (vertical guide switch) Closed Open
72 Bank Cover 2 2nd optional tray: Right
cover (vertical guide switch)
Closed Open
73 Bank Tray 1 Set 1st optional tray: Set Not set Set 74 Bank Tray 2 Set 2nd optional tray: Set Not set Set
75 Bank Tray 1 Paper End
1st optional tray: Paper end Not end End
76 Bank Tray 2 Paper End
2nd optional tray: Paper end Not end End
77 Bank Tray 1 Paper Size
1st optional tray: Paper size
78 Bank Tray 2 Paper Size
2nd optional tray: Paper size
(See table 2.)
79 Bank Tray 1 Paper Height
1st optional tray: Paper height
80 Bank Tray 2 Paper Height
2nd optional tray: Paper height
(See table 3.)
81 Duplex Entrance Duplex: Entrance sensor Not detected Detected 82 Duplex Exit Duplex: Exit sensor Detected Not detected 83 Duplex Open Duplex unit open switch Closed Open 84 Duplex Cover Duplex cover sensor Open Closed
86 Scanner Home Position
Scanner HP sensor Detected Not detected
87 Recycle Counter Mechanical Counter Set Set Not set 88 Counter Set Set Not set 89 Key Counter Set Set Not set
90 Shift Tray Home Position Sensor
Detected Not detected
91 Platen Cover Sensor
Detected Not detected
26 July 2002 DUMMY
5-67
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
Table 1: Tray 1 and 2 Paper Size
Switch North America Europe/Asia Value 1000 81/2" x 11" SEF 81/2" x 11" SEF 00001110 1001 B5 SEF B5 SEF 00000110 1010 51/2" x 81/2" LEF A5 LEF 00001010 1011 11" x 17" SEF A3 SEF 00000010 1100 A4 SEF A4 SEF 00001100 1101 B5 LEF B5 LEF 00000100 1110 81/2" x 11" LEF A4 LEF 00001000 1111 81/2" x 14" SEF B4 SEF 00000000
0: pushed 1: not pushed
Table 2: By-pass Tray Paper Size
Paper Width Value Paper Width Value A3/11"/12" 01110000 B5/8" 10010000
B4 00110000 A5/5.5" 11010000 A4/8.5" 10110000 B6 11000000
Table 3: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Size
Size North America Europe/Asia Code A3 SEF Detected Detected 10000100 B4 SEF None Detected 10001101 A4 SEF None Detected 10000101 A4 LEF Detected Detected 00000101 B5 LEF Detected Detected 00001110 A5 LEF None Detected 00000110
DLT SEF Detected Detected 10100000 LG SEF Detected None 10001101 LT SEF Detected None 10000101 LT LEF Detected Detected 00100110
HLT LEF Detected None 00000110
Table 4: Optional Paper Tray Unit Paper Near End
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 Paper height sensor 1 Code Full ON ON 11111111
Nearly full OFF ON 11111110 On OFF 11111101
Near end OFF OFF 11111100
DUMMY 26 July 2002
5-68
ARDF Input Check (SP6-007)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP6-007. 2. Enter the number (1 – 11) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s, as shown below. However, only bit 0 at the right side of the screen is valid.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3. Check the status of bit 0 for the required item listed in the table below.
Reading No. Description 0 1
1 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 2 Original width sensor 1 (W1) Paper not detected Paper detected 3 Original width sensor 2 (W2) Paper not detected Paper detected 4 Original length sensor 1 (L1) Paper not detected Paper detected 5 Original length sensor 2 (L2) Paper not detected Paper detected 6 Original trailing edge sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 7 ADF cover sensor Cover closed Cover opened 8 DF position sensor ADF closed ADF opened 9 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
10 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 11 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
W1
W2
B051S600.WMF
26 July 2002 DUMMY
5-69
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
Finisher Input Check (SP6-117)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP6-117. 2. Enter the number (1 – 113) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s, as shown below. However, only bit ) at the right side of the screen is valid.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in the table below.
Reading No. Description
0 1 1 Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated 2 Tray Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated 4 Staple Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated 5 Stapler Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 6 Jogger Fence Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 8 Feed-out Belt Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 9 Stapler Tray Paper Activated Deactivated 10 Stapler Rotation Home Position Activated Deactivated 11 Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated 14 Staple Sheet Sensor Activated Deactivated 17 Exit Plate Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 18 Tray Shift Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 21 Stack Height Sensor Activated Deactivated 23 Tray Lower Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated 101 500 Fin Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated 102 500 Fin Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated 103 500 Fin Jogger Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 104 500 Fin Top Cover Sensor Closed Opened 105 500 Fin Height Sensor Activated Deactivated 106 500 Fin Lever Sensor Activated Deactivated 107 500 Fin Upper Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated 108 500 Fin Near Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated 109 500 Fin Staple Cover Sensor Closed Opened 110 500 Fin Stapler Home Position Sensor Activated Deactivated 111 500 Fin Staple End Sensor Activated Deactivated 112 500 Fin Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated 113 500 Fin Stapler Lock Sensor Locked Not Locked
DUMMY 26 July 2002
5-70
5.1.5 OUTPUT CHECK NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor
signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804)
1. Open SP5-804. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.) 3. Touch ON to test the selected item. Press OFF to end the test.
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical component switched ON for a long time.
Output Check Table
SP5-804 -XXX Description
1 Feed Mot: 89 mm/s Paper feed motor: 89 mm/s 2 Feed Mot: 120 mm/s Paper feed motor: 120 mm/s 3 Feed Mot: 178 mm/s Paper feed motor: 178 mm/s 4 Feed Mot: 240 mm/s Paper feed motor: 240 mm/s 5 Upper Paper Feed
Clutch Tray 1 paper feed clutch
6 Lower Paper Feed Clutch
Tray 2 paper feed clutch
7 Upper Relay Roller Clutch
Tray 1 vertical transport clutch
8 Lower Relay Roller Clutch
Tray 2 vertical transport clutch
9 Transfer Motor: Half Speed
Main motor: 178 mm/s
B051S505.WMF
26 July 2002 DUMMY
5-71
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
SP5-804 -XXX Description
10 Transfer Motor: Low Speed
Main motor: 89 mm/s
11 Regist Clutch Registration clutch 12 Interchange Upper
Gate Interchange Junction Gate Solenoid 1
13 Interchange Lower Gate
Interchange Junction Gate Solenoid 2
14 By-pass Feed Clutch By-pass paper feed clutch 15 By-pass Pick-Up
Solenoid By-pass pick-up solenoid
16 Development Clutch: M Development clutch: M 17 Development Clutch: C Development clutch: C 18 Development Clutch: Y Development clutch: Y 19 Development Clutch: K Development clutch: K 20 Development Motor
(Forward) Development motor
21 Development Motor Half Speed (Forward)
Development motor: Half Speed
22 Development Motor (Reverse)
Development motor: Reverse
23 Development Motor Half Speed (Reverse)
Development motor: Reverse Half Speed
24 Lubricant Clutch OPC belt cleaning clutch 25 Main Motor (Forward) Main motor: Regular Speed 26 Main Motor Half Speed
(Forward) Main motor: Half Speed
27 Main Motor (Reverse) Main motor: Reverse 28 Main Motor Half Speed
(Reverse) Main motor: Reverse Half Speed
29 Polygon Motor Polygon motor 30 LD On LD 31 Polygon Motor + LD Polygon Motor + LD 32 Transfer 2nd Solenoid Paper Transfer Solenoid 33 T/B Cleaning Clutch Image transfer belt cleaning clutch 34 T/B Cleaning Solenoid Image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid 40 Engine Ready Signal Engine Ready Signal 41 ID sensor LED 42 QL 43 Toner End Led Toner End LED 44 Charger Bias Charge corona unit output 45 Development Bias 1 Development Bias: 1 46 Development Bias 2 Development Bias: 2 47 Belt Transfer Image transfer power supply 48 Paper Transfer: + Paper transfer bias: + 49 Paper Transfer: – Paper transfer bias: – 50 T/B Cleaning: + Image transfer belt cleaning bias: + 51 Discharge: H Discharge plate power supply: H 52 Discharge: L Discharge plate power supply: L
DUMMY 26 July 2002
5-72
SP5-804 -XXX Description
53 Fuser Main Relay Fusing Main Relay 54 Fusing Bias Fusing Bias 55 Scanner Lamp 100 Bank Upper Feed 1st paper feed clutch (optional paper tray unit) 101 Bank Lower Feed 2nd paper feed clutch (optional paper tray unit) 102 Bank Feed Motor: L 1st paper feed motor (optional paper tray unit) 103 Bank Feed Motor: H 1st Paper feed motor – half speed (optional paper tray
unit) 110 Shift Tray Motor: CW Shift Tray Motor – continuous clockwise 111 Shift Tray Motor: CCW Shift Tray Motor – continuous counter-clockwise 112 Shift Tray Motor: Run Shift Tray Motor – shifts once 120 Duplex Reverse Motor
(Forward) Duplex: Inverter motor
121 Duplex Reverse Motor (Reverse)
Duplex: Inverter motor – reverse
122 Duplex Feed Motor (Forward)
Duplex: Transport motor
123 Duplex Feed Motor (Reverse)
Duplex: Transport motor – reverse
124 Duplex Solenoid Duplex: Inverter gate solenoid 125 Duplex Free Run Duplex: Free run 130 Bridge Motor: H 131 Bridge Motor: L 132 Bridge Gate Sol 140 Fusing Fan: H 141 Fusing Fan: L 142 Dev Fan: H Development Fan Motor: H 143 Dev. Fan: L Development Fan Motor: L 144 Cooling Fan: H Controller Fan Motor: H 145 Cooling Fan: L Controller Fan Motor: L 146 Ozone Fan: Hi 147 Ozone Fan: Low 160 Bridge Cooling Fan: H 161 Bridge Cooling Fan: L 162 PSU Fan 170 Forced Lubricant The following parts are switched on.
O/B cleaning contact clutch T/B cleaning solenoid T/B cleaning contact clutch
26 July 2002 DUMMY
5-73
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
ARDF Output Check (SP6-008)
1. Open SP6-008. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.) 3. Touch ON to test the selected item. To end the test, touch OFF. You cannot
exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off the output check currently executing.
No. Description 1 Feed Motor (Forward) 2 Feed Motor (Reverse) 3 Transport Motor (Forward) 4 Feed Clutch 5 Pick-up Solenoid 6 Junction Gate Solenoid 7 Stamp Solenoid
Finisher Output Check (SP6-118)
1. Open SP6-118. 2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table below.) 3. Touch ON to test the selected item. To end the test, touch OFF. You cannot
exit and close this display until you touch OFF to switch off the output check currently executing.
Description Description No. 1000-sheet finisher
No. 500-sheet finisher
1 Fin All Off 101 500 Fin All Off 2 Upper Transfer Motor 102 500 Fin Main Motor 3 Lower Transfer Motor 103 500 Fin Jogger Motor 4 Exit Motor 104 500 Fin Paddle Sol 5 Tray Gate Sol 105 500 Fin Gear Sol 6 Tray Lift Motor 106 500 Fin Lever Sol 7 Jogger Motor 107 500 Fin Tray Motor 12 Stapler Motor 108 500 Fin Stapler Motor 13 Staple Hummer 109 500 Fin Free Run 1 15 Stapler Gate Sol 110 500 Fin Free Run 2 16 Pos. Roller Sol 18 Feed-out Motor 19 Shift Motor 22 Guide Plate Motor 23 Fin Free Run 1 24 Fin Free Run 2
DUMMY 26 July 2002
5-74
5.1.6 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5-990)
1. Open SP mode 5-990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists) 1 All data list 2 SP mode data list 3 UP mode data list 4 Logged data list 5 Self-diagnostics results list 6 Non-Default Data list 7 NIB summary 8 Net file log list (Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the Desk Top Binder software) 21 Copy UP mode list 22 Scanner SP mode list 23 Scanner UP mode list
2. Touch EXECUTE on the touch panel 3. Operate according to the instructions on the display. 4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit. 5.1.7 ORIGINAL JAM HISTORY DISPLAY
Total Count SP7-503 displays the number of original jams having occurred in the optional ARDF.
Details on the Most Recent Jams SP7-508 displays the detailed information on the latest 10 original jams having occurred in the optional ARDF.
SP7-508- 1 Latest Information on the latest original jam 2 Latest 1 Information on the 2nd latest original jam 3 Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest original jam : :
: :
: :
8 Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest original jam 9 Latest 8 Information on the 9th latest original jam
10 Latest 9 Information on the 10th latest original jam
26 July 2002 DUMMY
5-75
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5.1.8 COPY JAM HISTORY DISPLAY
Total Count SP7-502 displays the number of copy paper jams having occurred in all paper paths.
Details on the Most Recent Jams SP7-507 displays the detailed information on the latest 10 copy paper jams having occurred in all paper paths.
SP7-507- 1 Latest Information on the latest paper jam 2 Latest 1 Information on the 2nd latest paper jam 3 Latest 2 Information on the 3rd latest paper jam : :
: :
: :
8 Latest 7 Information on the 8th latest paper jam 9 Latest 8 Information on the 9th latest paper jam
10 Latest 9 Information on the 10th latest paper jam
DUMMY 26 July 2002
5-76
5.1.9 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801)
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their default settings except the following:
SP7-003-1 Print total counter value SP5-811 Machine serial number SP5-907 Plug & play brand name and production name setting
Normally, this SP mode should not be used. This procedure is necessary only after replacing the NVRAM, or when the copier malfunctions because the NVRAM is damaged.
Using a Flash Memory Card
1. Upload the NVRAM data to a flash memory card (☛ NVRAM Data Upload). 2. Print out all SMC data lists (SP5-990).
NOTE: Be sure to print out all the lists. If the NVRAM data upload is not completed, it is necessary to manually change the SP mode settings.
3. Open SP5-801. 4. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application software is initialized. Touch 1, for example, if you want to initialize all modules; or select the appropriate number from the table below.
No. What It Initializes Comments 1 All modules Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below. 2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
process settings. 3 SCS (System Control
Service)/SRAM Initializes default system settings, CSS settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
4 IMH (Image Memory handler)
Initializes the registration setting for the image memory handler. (Deletes all image files in the HDD).
5 MCS (Memory Control Service)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents.
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings. 7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
10 Network application Deletes the network file application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
26 July 2002 DUMMY
5-77
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
No. What It Initializes Comments 11 NCS
(Network Control Service) Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
12 R-FAX Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
14 DCS Initializes the DCS (Delivery & Receive Control Server) settings
15 UCS Initializes the UCS (User Directory Control Server) settings.
5. Touch EXECUTE, and turn the main switch off and on. 6. Download the NVRAM data from a flash memory card (☛ 5.2.2). Without Using a Flash Memory Card If there is no flash memory card, follow the steps below.
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC data lists. 2. Open SP5-801. 3. Select the number for the item that you want to initialize. 4. Press EXECUTE and turn the main switch off and on. 5. Make sure that you do the following:
• Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments (☛ “Copy Adjustments” in chapter 3, “Replacement and Adjustment”).
• Do the touch screen calibration (☛ “Touch Screen Calibration” in chapter 3, “Replacement and Adjustment”).
• Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter all values that have been changed from their factory settings.
• Do the white level adjustment (☛ Section 3.14 Standard White Density Adjustment)
6. Check the copy quality and the paper paths, and do any necessary adjustments.
DUMMY 26 July 2002
5-78
5.1.10 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4-301)
SP4-301 displays a code that indicates the current status of the APS sensors. The table lists the codes and the activated sensors.
Sensors Code
W1 W2 L1 L2 L3 38 ❍ ❍ — — — 160 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ 164 — — ❍ ❍ ❍ 166 — — ❍ ❍ — 128 Other combinations
❍: Activated —: Deactivated
W1
W2
L3L2L1
B051S540.WMF
26 July 2002 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
5-79
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5.2 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 5.2.1 FIRMWARE
The procedure is the same for all firmware modules.
1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Remove the cover [A]. 3. Insert the IC card [B] containing
the software you wish to download into the card slot of the controller.
4. Open the front cover. 5. Turn on the main power. 6. Follow the instructions displayed
on the operation panel 7. Monitor the downloading status
on the operation panel. • While downloading is in
progress, the panel displays “Writing”. When downloading has been completed, the panel displays “Completed”.
• The Start key lights red while downloading is in progress, and then lights green again after downloading is completed.
#CAUTION Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller.
8. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and remove the IC card.
9. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7. 10. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the
machine starts normally. 11. After installing new scanner firmware, perform copier SP5-801-9 (Memory All
Clear – Scanner Application).
NOTE: If the download failed, an error message appears on the panel. In this case, download the firmware again using the IC card. In this condition, if the firmware cannot be downloaded again, do the following: Controller firmware: Turn on dip switch 1 on the controller board, and switch on. The machine boots from the IC card. Download the new firmware. Others: Replace the appropriate PCB.
B051S136.WMF
[A]
[B]
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 26 July 2002
5-80
5.2.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from a flash memory card. Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824) The data in the NVRAM in the machine can be uploaded to a flash memory card.
1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the cover [A]. 3. Plug the flash memory card [B]
into the card slot. 4. Turn on the main switch. 5. Open SP5-824. 6. Touch EXECUTE to start
uploading the NVRAM data. 7. Turn off the main switch, and then
remove the IC card.
B051S136.WMF
[A]
[B]
26 July 2002 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
5-81
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825) SP5-825 downloads data from a flash card to the NVRAM inside the machine. The following data are not downloaded from the flash card: • Meter charge total counter (SP7-003-1) • Duplex, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning
counters (SP7-007).
1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the cover [A]. 3. Plug the flash memory card [B]
into the card slot. 4. Turn on the main switch. 8. Open SP5-825. 5. Touch EXECUTE to start
download the NVRAM data. 6. Turn off the main switch, and then
remove the IC card. Note that the following errors may occur during downloading: • If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that downloading
cannot proceed, you cannot execute downloading, even by pressing EXECUTE. • If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you
press EXECUTE a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the card is abnormal and the execution halts.
B051S136.WMF
[A]
[B]
SOFTWARE RESET 26 July 2002
5-82
5.3 SOFTWARE RESET The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use either of the following procedures.
Procedure 1 1. Turn the main power switch off and on. 2. Check that “Now loading. Please wait” is displayed and that the copy window
opens.
Procedure 2 1. Press and hold down the ! and ! keys together until the machine beeps (for
about 10 seconds). 2. Release both buttons. 3. Check that “Now loading. Please wait” is displayed and that the copy window
opens. 5.4 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET 5.4.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET
To reset the system settings in the UP mode to their defaults. Use the following procedure.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key ("). 2. Hold down the ! key and touch System Settings.
NOTE: Hold down the ! key before touching System Settings.
3. When the display asks if you want to reset the system settings, touch Yes. 4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit.
B051S503.WMF
26 July 2002 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
5-83
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
5.4.2 COPIER SETTING RESET
To reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults, use the following procedure.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key ("). 2. Hold down the ! key and then touch Copier/Document Server Features.
NOTE: Hold down the ! key before touching Copier/Document Server Features.
3. When the display asks if you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings, touch Yes.
4. Check that the completion message appears, and touch Exit.
B051S504.WMF
USER TOOLS 26 July 2002
5-84
5.5 USER TOOLS The user program (UP) mode can be accessed by users and operators, and by sales and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copier’s default settings. The user can reset the default settings at any time. 5.5.1 HOW TO ENTER USER TOOLS
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display To enter the UP mode, press the User Tools/Counter key ("). System Settings In the User Tools/Counter display, touch System Settings. Touch a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner, touch it to display more options. Specify the settings, touch Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter display, and then touch Exit to return to the copy window. Copier/Document Server Features In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Copy/Document Server Settings. Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner, press it to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window. Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Printer Settings, Facsimile, or Scanner Settings to open the appropriate screen and then touch the tab to display more settings. The screen below shows the Printer Features screen. Inquiry In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Inquiry. The following SP mode settings will be displayed.
• Service Telephone Number (SP5-812-1) • Service Facsimile Number (SP5-812-2) • Telephone Number for ordering consumables (SP5-812-3) • Sales Telephone Number (SP5-812-4) • Toner Type (SP5-841-1~4)
26 July 2002 DIP SWITCHES
5-85
Serv
ice
Tabl
es
Counter In the User/Tools Counter display, touch Counter. The following SP mode counters will be displayed.
• Copy Counter (SP5-914) View the settings, touch Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter display, and then touch Exit to return to the copy window. 5.6 DIP SWITCHES Controller Board: SW2
DIP SW No. OFF ON 1 Boot-up from machine Boot-up from IC card 2 3 4
Not used (keep at OFF)
If the controller firmware download attempt failed, you must boot the machine from the IC card. To do this, set DIP SW 1 on the controller board to ON.
BICU Board: SW2 DIP SW No.
Function
OFF
ON
1 Machine Type U-C1b U-C1a
2 Off: Off: Off: On: On: Off: 3 Destination Off: JAN On: NA Off: EU On: AA Off: TWN On: CHN 4 Off: Off: On: Off: Off: On: 5 Not used 6 Not used Keep at OFF
JAN: Japan, NA: North America, EU: Europe, AA: Asia, TWN: Taiwan, CHN: China
26 July 2002 OVERVIEW
6-1
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
1. Scanner HP sensor 2. ADF exposure glass 3. Exposure glass 4. 2nd carriage 5. Scanner lamp 6. 1st carriage 7. Original width sensor 8. Scanner motor 9. Sensor board unit 10. Original length sensors 11. Fusing unit
12. Paper transfer roller unit 13. Image transfer belt waste toner bottle 14. Image transfer belt unit 15. OPC belt cleaning unit 16. OPC belt waste toner bottle 17. Paper tray 2 18. Paper tray 1 19. Laser optics unit 20. Development unit 21. OPC belt unit 22. Image transfer belt cleaning unit
B051D107.WMF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 17
18
19
20
21
22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
OVERVIEW 26 July 2002
6-2
6.1.2 PAPER PATH
1. Registration sensor (ARDF) 2. Original exit sensor (ARDF) 3. Original set sensor (ARDF) 4. Original trailing edge sensor (ARDF) 5. Original width sensor board (ARDF) 6. Original length sensor 1 (ARDF) 7. Original length sensor 2 (ARDF) 8. Relay sensor (Bridge unit) 9. Tray exit sensor (Bridge unit) 10. Paper sensor (1-bin tray) 11. Paper overflow sensor 12. Exit sensor (Interchange unit) 13. Entrance sensor (Duplex unit) 14. Paper exit sensor 15. Fusing exit sensor
16. Registration sensor 17. Exit sensor (Duplex unit) 18. Paper feed sensor 19. Paper end sensor (By-pass tray) 20. Paper feed sensor 21. Relay sensor (Paper tray 3) 22. Relay sensor (Paper tray 4) 23. Stapler tray entrance sensor
(Finisher) 24. Stack feed-out belt HP sensor
(Finisher) 25. Lower tray exit sensor (Finisher) 26. Paper limit sensor (Finisher) 27. Entrance sensor (Finisher)
B051D151.WMF
9
10
11 12
13
14
16
17
18
19
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
15
20
26 July 2002 OVERVIEW
6-3
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.1.3 DRIVE COMPONENTS
Layout
1. Fusing unit motor 2. Image transfer belt cleaning clutch 3. Image transfer belt cleaning contact
solenoid 4. Scanner motor 5. Main motor 6. Development clutch - K 7. Development clutch - Y 8. Development motor 9. Development clutch - C 10. Paper size switch 1
11. Paper size switch 2 12. Development clutch - M 13. OPC belt cleaning clutch 14. Paper feed motor 15. Paper feed clutch 2 16. Vertical transport clutch 2 17. Paper feed clutch 1 18. Vertical transport clutch 1 19. Registration clutch 20. Paper transfer solenoid
B051D104.WMF
10
11
12 1314 15
16
17
18
19
1 2 3 4
56
7
8
920
OVERVIEW 26 July 2002
6-4
Drive Power Path
Motor (Type) Drives ... Scanner [B] (Stepper)
• Scanner motor gear [C]
Development [I] (DC brushless)
• Development clutches [HK,Y,C,M] → Development units • OPC belt cleaning clutch → OPC belt cleaning unit
Main [G] (DC brushless)
• OPC belt [L] with the flywheel [J] • Image transfer belt [M]
Fusing Unit [D] (DC brushless)
• Fusing unit [S] • Paper exit unit [A] • Image transfer belt cleaning clutch [E] → Image transfer belt cleaning
unit • Registration clutch [Q] → Registration roller • Paper transfer roller • Belt cleaning contact solenoid [F] → Image transfer belt cleaning unit
contact mechanism • Paper transfer solenoid [R] → Paper transfer roller contact mechanism • Interchange unit and one-bin tray
Paper Feed [N] (Stepper)
• Paper feed clutch [O1,2] → Paper pick-up roller • Vertical transport clutch [P1,2]
B051D108.WMF
[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F]
[G]
[HK]
[I]
[J]
[K] [L][M] [N][O2]
[P2]
[Q]
[R]
[S] [HY]
[HC]
[HM]
[O1]
[P1]
REAR VIEW
26 July 2002 OVERVIEW
6-5
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Scanner Unit
1. Anti-condensation heater 2. Scanner HP sensor 3. Platen cover sensor 4. Original length sensor 1 5. Original length sensor 2
6. SBU (sensor board unit) 7. Lamp stabilizer 8. Original width sensor 9. Operation panel 10. Exposure lamp
B051D109.WMF
1 23
4
5
6
7 8
9
10
OVERVIEW 26 July 2002
6-6
Image Transfer
1. Charge corona wire cleaner motor2. Quenching lamp 3. ID sensor 4. Belt mark sensor 5. T/B waste toner bottle switch 6. T/B waste toner sensor 7. O/B waste toner sensor 8. O/B waste toner bottle switch
9. Pressure roller thermofuse 10. Pressure roller thermistor 11. Heating roller thermistor 12. Pressure roller fusing lamp 13. Heating roller fusing lamp 14. Oil overflow sensor 15. Heating roller thermostat 16. Oil end sensor
T/B: Image transfer belt O/B: OPC belt
B051D103.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
12
13
15
16
14
26 July 2002 OVERVIEW
6-7
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Paper Path
1. Right cover switch 2. Interlock switch 3. Paper overflow sensor 4. Fusing exit sensor 5. Registration sensor 6. Paper feed sensor 7. Paper near-end sensor 1 8. Right lower cover switch 9. Paper near-end sensor 2 10. Vertical transport sensor
11. Paper end sensor 2 12. Paper end sensor 1 13. Tray heater (optional) 14. Mechanical counter 2 15. Mechanical counter 1 16. Exit cover switch 17. Paper exit sensor 18. Main power switch 19. Front cover switch
B051D111.WMF
1 2
3
5
7
9
6
4
10111213
8
19
18
17
1615
14
OVERVIEW 26 July 2002
6-8
Development Units
1. Rear development board 2. Laser synch. detection board 3. Front development board 4. Polygonal mirror motor 5. LD unit
6. Memory chip M 7. Memory chip C 8. Memory chip Y 9. Memory chip K
B051D102.WMF
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
26 July 2002 OVERVIEW
6-9
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Boards
1. Scanner I/O board 2. I/O board 3. Development fan 4. EX I/O board 5. BICU board 6. Controller fan 7. Power supply unit 8. Ozone fan
9. PSU fan 10. Temperature/humidity sensor 11. Controller board 12. High voltage supply board 13. Oil pump 14. Fusing unit fan 15. Paper exit fan
B051D110.WMF
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
11
12
14
15 3
810
13
BOARD STRUCTURE 26 July 2002
6-10
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE 6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Ex-IOB
By-pass Duplex
1-Bin Tray
BridgeUnit
Finisher
Sensors Clutches/Solenoids
HighVoltage
P.P
Thermistors
PSU
Motors
PaperTray Unit/
LCT
ARDF
APS
LampStabilizer
LSD
LD Units
NIB
SBU
OperationPanel
PolygonMotor
Fax Options
Fusing Lamps
: Standard
: Option
Fax Unit
Printer/Scanner/
PS3
HDD
IOB
Inter-change
Scanner IOB
IEEE1394/Wireless
LANMemory
ScannerMotor
Xenon Lamp
Controller
BICU
B051D554.WMF
26 July 2002 BOARD STRUCTURE
6-11
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
1. Controller (Main Board) Controls the memory and the fax/scanner/printer options.
2. BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit) This is the scanner and engine control board. It controls the following functions: • Engine sequence • Timing control for peripherals • Image processing control and video control • Operation control • Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids of the printer and
scanner • High voltage supply board control • Fusing control
3. IOB (Input/Output Board) Controls the sensors, motors, clutches, and solenoids of the main unit.
4. Ex-IOB (Extended Input/Output Board) Handles the serial interfaces with peripherals.
5. Scanner IOB (Scanner Input/Output Board) Handles the following functions. • Serial interfaces with ARDF and operation panel • Scanner motor control
6. SBU (Sensor Board Unit) The SBU converts the analog signals from the CCD into digital signals.
BOARD STRUCTURE 26 July 2002
6-12
6.2.2 CONTROLLER
The controller uses GW (Ground Work) architecture, which allows the board to control all applications (copier, printer, scanner, and fax). To add an optional printer, scanner, or fax application, install a ROM DIMM on the controller. The fax option, however, requires FCU and NCU installation also. Systems and application software can be downloaded from the controller’s IC Card slot. For details about how to download software from an IC card (☛ 5.2).
IEEE1284 IC Card RAM(128/256 MB)
NIB
IC Card I/F IDE Slot 1 Slot 2 SDRAMDIMM
SystemFlash ROM
(8 MB)
On-boardSDRAM(128 MB)
CELLO CPU NVRAM(32 kB)
PCI
OPTION OPTION
2.5" HDD
CONTROLLER PCIPCI
BICU FCU NCU
OPTION
IEEE1394/Wireless LAN
OPTION
PCI BUS
Local BUS
OPTION
Slot 3
Flash ROM DIMM (4/8 MB)
OPTION
Net File/ScannerPS3Printer
OPTION
B529D500.WMF
26 July 2002 BOARD STRUCTURE
6-13
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
1. CPU: PMC RM526A-250 MHz
2. CELLO ASIC: This is a dedicated chip developed for use with GW architecture. It controls the following functions: memory, local bus, interrupts, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel, IEEE1284, and image processing.
3. Flash ROM: 8MB Flash ROM for the system program
4. SDRAM (on-board): 128 MB SDRAM, expandable with 128 MB or 256 MB optional DRAM.
5. Flash ROM DIMM Slots: Three slots are provided for three ROM DIMMs. Expansion slots provided for the optional printer, scanner, facsimile, and PostScript 3 applications.
6. NVRAM: Stores the engine and controller settings
7. PCI Interface: For installing the FCU board, IEEE1394, and wireless LAN. The IEEE1394, and wireless LAN cannot both be installed on the same machine at the same time.
8. HDD: Used for the document server. Also used for collation, locked print, sample print, form overlay, and font storage. The hard disk is partitioned as shown below.
Partition 40GB HDD Function Comment
Image Local Storage 16,500 MB Document server Remains stored even after cycling
power off/on.
File System 1 500 MB Downloaded fonts, forms.
Remains stored even after cycling power off/on.
File System 2 1,000 MB Job spooling area Erased after power off.
File System 3 2,000 MB Work data area Remains stored even after cycling power off/on.
7,486 MB Commonly used area for applications Erased after power off.
7,200 MB Copier application Erased after power off. 3,440 MB Printer application Erased after power off.
Image TMP
1,000 MB Scanner application Erased after power off.
Job Log 10 MB Job log Remains stored even after cycling power off/on.
Scanner 1024 MB For mail Erased after power off. Others 840 MB Debug Erased after power off. Total 4100 MB
COPY PROCESS 26 July 2002
6-14
6.3 COPY PROCESS
1. Development unit 2. OPC belt 3. Image transfer belt cleaning unit 4. Image transfer belt 5. Paper transfer roller unit
6. Quenching lamp 7. OPC belt cleaning unit 8. Charge corona unit 9. Polygonal mirror
B051D101.WMF
1 23
4
5
89 6
7
26 July 2002 COPY PROCESS
6-15
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
1. Drum Charge The corona wire gives the drum a negative charge.
2. Black (K) Image Creation a) Laser Exposure
The laser diode (LD) emits two laser beams. The laser beams create a latent image on the OPC surface.
b) Development The development roller transfers negatively charged toner to the latent image. The OPC belt surface holds only one toner color at one time.
c) Image Transfer The OPC belt transfers the single-color toner image to the image transfer belt.
d) Cleaning The OPC belt cleaning unit cleans the image transfer belt.
3. Magenta (M) Image Creation Same as 2 a) through 2 d) above.
4. Cyan (C) Image Creation Same as 2 a) through 2 d) above.
5. Yellow (Y) Image Creation Same as 2 a) through 2 d) above.
6. Paper Transfer The paper transfer roller transfers the combined CMYK toner image to the paper. The OPC belt and the image transfer belt can hold two A4-size LEF images on their surfaces. When printing on A4 LEF or smaller paper, the OPC and image transfer belts process two images in one cycle. At this time, two sheets of paper are consecutively output with little interval between them. This speeds up color print output.
7. Separation The paper is separated from the image transfer belt when the belt curves away from it. A discharge plate assists this process.
8. Fusing The fusing unit fuses the image to the paper.
9. Cleaning The image transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the belt.
10. Quenching The quenching lamp erases any remaining charge on the OPC belt.
PROCESS CONTROL 26 July 2002
6-16
6.4 PROCESS CONTROL 6.4.1 OVERVIEW
The copier adjusts the following process control parameters: • Development bias (VB) • Charge corona grid voltage (VG)
These 2 parameters maintain a consistent gamma for the engine.
NOTE: This copier uses only the ID sensor. (There is no TD or potential sensor.) 6.4.2 PROCESS CONTROL STEPS
Six Steps Depending on the machine’s condition, some or all of the following steps may occur:
➀: ID sensor calibration ➁: Color development bias initialization (M, then C, then Y) ➂: K development bias initialization ➃: M, C, Y, and K bias fine adjustment ➄: Charge grid bias voltage adjustment ➅: Process control interval counter reset
If the main power is turned off (or the cover opened) during a process control session, the session is aborted. Turning the power on (or closing the cover) restarts the process control session. When is Process Control Done? When an event arises, the specified steps are performed.
Event Condition Steps Forced process control
When forced process control is done (engine SP mode 3-001-1)
➀ → ➅
Process control regular interval
When more than 200 sheets have been printed upon completion of a job. (The interval can be changed with engine SP3-003-1.)
➀, ➃, ➄, ➅
Power on When the fusing pressure roller temperature is 60°C or lower immediately after the power is turned on.
➀, ➃, ➄, ➅
Environmental change
When the change in the temperature/humidity sensor output since the previous process control exceeds a certain value. SP3-004 can be used to change the threshold temperature and humidity values.
➀, ➃, ➄, ➅
26 July 2002 PROCESS CONTROL
6-17
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Event Condition Steps K toner cartridge or K development unit replacement
This is done after clearing the K toner near-end state (i.e., when a new K development unit is added). The machine idles and when the development roller stops for 10 seconds, indicating that idling is over, process control occurs.
➀, ➂, ➃, !
Color development unit replacement
After the color toner end or near-end state is reset, the machine idles to transfer color toner to the development unit. After idling, process control occurs.
➀ → ➅
Color toner cartridge replacement
After the color toner end or near-end state is reset, the machine idles to transfer color toner to the development unit. After idling, process control occurs.
➀, ➃, ➄, ➅
24 hours after previous process control
Same as ‘power on’ process control ➀, ➃, ➄, ➅
PCU replacement After the PCU counter is reset, it is lubricated (new OPC belt lubricant application mode). Then process control occurs.
➀ → ➅
Supplementary Information on Process Control The following is a brief explanation of process control. This is for your reference. If the information is helpful for understanding the machine in the field, read the following explanation.
Step 1. ID Sensor Calibration This calibration compensates for changes in the condition of the OPC belt or the ID sensor. The ID sensor detects the light reflected from the bare OPC belt. The LED current is adjusted until the sensor output is correct. The LED current for the color toner detection circuit is adjusted based on the adjustment made for the black toner detection circuit.
Step 2. Initializing Color Development Bias For each color, the machine makes a solid patch (20x25) of toner on the OPC belt. The ID sensor detects the density of the patch. The laser power for the patch of toner is constant at about 210/255. Each color is calibrated separately (this step has three stages - one for each color). M/A must be the following for areas of maximum image density: 0.65 mg/cm2, Range:0.40 to 0.90 mg/cm2. If the detected M/A is different from the target M/A, the development bias is adjusted. Colour development bias initialisation is not always done. This is to reduce the amount of time taken for process control. Also, in step 4, the current colour development bias values are fine-tuned to correct for any changes in the machine or temperature/humidity since the last full process control. This step always has to be done when installing a new development unit. The toner amount carried by a development roller varies with each unit. (The toner amount used for a certain development bias is not the same.) Black development bias initialisation (step 3) has to be done more often, because tests have shown that process control errors occur more often if this is not done.
PROCESS CONTROL 26 July 2002
6-18
Step 3. Initialising K Development Bias Similar to the process for color development bias. M/A must be 0.65 mg/cm2 for areas of maximum image density. Range: 0.40 to 2.0 mg/cm2
Step 4. Fine-tuning the YMCK Development Biases The machine makes another solid pattern Steps 2 and 3 for determining VB (development bias) are not done every process control (see the table: When is the process control done?). Because of this, the solid area density, based on the VB obtained during initialisation, may change as a result of changes inside the machine after a period of use, or because of environmental changes. To suppress these fluctuations, this step fine-tunes VB at regular intervals, or if the environmental conditions change. The machine adjusts the development bias based on these results.
Step 5. Charge Grid Voltage Adjustment The machine makes a very low image density pattern (20x25 mm), which consists of a replacing 3 x 3 matrix of pixels on the OPC belt. Two of these pixels are of high intensity (dark), and the others are at zero intensity (LD off, white). The two high intensity pixels are close together.
0 0 0 240 240 0
0 0 0
This is only to give you a rough idea - the exact pixel densities used by this machine are not shown here. The net effect is to have two dark pixels surrounded by white pixels on all sides, repeated all over the paper. If there is a difference between the target M/A and the detected M/A, the grid voltage is adjusted.
Step 6. Resetting the Process Control Interval Counter The counter is in the NVRAM on the controller board, and is reset after process control. The counter is not reset after black development unit or black toner cartridge replacement. This is because only a few of the process control steps are done after replacing these components.
26 July 2002 SCANNING
6-19
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.5 SCANNING 6.5.1 OVERVIEW
1. Scanner HP sensor 2. ADF exposure glass 3. Exposure glass 4. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 5. Scanner lamp
6. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 7. Scanner motor 8. Sensor board unit (SBU) 9. Original length sensors 10. Original width sensor
(☛ ! Digital Processes – Digital scanning – Basic concepts) Book mode: The scanner motor drives the 1st and 2nd scanners. The original is scanned from left to right. ADF mode: The ADF feeds the original past the ADF exposure glass. The 1st scanner moves under the ADF exposure glass. The original does not stay on the glass, but keeps going to the ADF exit.
B051D557.WMF
7
8 910
1 2 4 5 6 3
SCANNING 26 July 2002
6-20
6.5.2 SCANNER DRIVE
Scanner drive: Scanner motor [A] " Scanner drive pulley [B and C], and scanner drive shaft [D] " Scanner wires [E and F] " 1st [G] and 2nd [H] scanners Book Mode The scanner I/O board controls the scanner motor. The 1st scanner moves twice as fast as the 2nd scanner. For reduction/enlargement, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, regardless of magnification ratio. Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the scanner motor speed. Main-scan magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board. NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the scanner-
motor speed (☛ SP4-008). ARDF Mode The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home positions; the scanner HP sensor detects the 1st scanner position, and the 2nd scanner position is linked with that of the 1st scanner. Sub-scan magnification is controlled by the ADF feed speed. Main-scan magnification is controlled by image processing on the BICU board. NOTE: Sub-scan magnification errors can be corrected by changing the ADF feed-
speed (☛ SP6-006-5).
B051D002.WMF
[G] [B]
[C]
[A]
[E][D] [B]
[F]
26 July 2002 SCANNING
6-21
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length sensors [B] detect the original length. The on/off signals received from the sensors are used to detect the original size. The SBU board checks each sensor signal at the following times:
• Just after the platen cover is closed • When the start key is pushed, if the platen cover stays open.
When the by-pass tray is used, the machine assumes that the paper is set lengthwise. So, if A4 paper is set sideways on the by-pass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper (set lengthwise) and scans the whole A3 area, disregarding the original size sensors. However, when the registration sensor detects that the paper is not A3 but only A4 sideways, paper feed stops and a jam occurs. This is to prevent large amounts of toner transferring from the transfer belt to the transfer roller. (Also see SP 1-940.) NOTE: Original size detection using the ARDF is described in the manual for the
ARDF.
The table (next page) shows the sizes that are detected for various sensor outputs.
B051D004.WMF
[A] [B]
SCANNING 26 July 2002
6-22
Original Size Length Sensor Width Sensor
Metric Inch L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
SP4-301display
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132 B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141 F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165 A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133 B5-L X X O X X 142 A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5 B5-S X X X X O 14 A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present
For other combinations, “Cannot detect original size.” is displayed on the operation panel.
W1
W2
L3L2L1
B051D540.WMF
26 July 2002 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-23
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING 6.6.1 OVERVIEW
The CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals. The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital signals. It sends these signals to the BICU board. The BICU board processes the image, then the image data is sent to the LD unit.
BICU
Memory
Controller
LD Board
CC
D
HDD
SBU
Scanner(Option)
Printer(Option)
Fax(Option)
B051D553.WMF
IMAGE PROCESSING 26 July 2002
6-24
6.6.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM
Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification • Odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals from the CCD are amplified.
2. Signal Composition • The amplified signals are combined after A/D conversion.
A/D Conversion • The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1,024 gradations)
digital signals.
White Level Correction • A white reference plate is scanned before the original is scanned. • Data is updated before the original is scanned. • The differences in the white level across the page, including irregularities in the
CCD and the optical parts across the main scan, are corrected. Others The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if originals are scanned through the ARDF.
Analog AmplifierA/D Converter
CCD
SBU
Analog AmplifierA/D Converter
Analog AmplifierA/D Converter
SBUController
R(B)OE
OE
OE
G
B(R)
10 bit
10 bit
10 bit
FieldMemory
FieldMemory ASIC
BICU
10 bit
10 bit
10 bit
R
G
B
8 bit
8 bit
8 bit
B051D551.WMF
26 July 2002 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-25
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Black Level Correction • Improves image reproduction for high-density areas. • Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels are
masked off, and should produce a pure black signal. • This is subtracted from the value of each pixel. • Calculated for each scan line. • Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine
scans down the page. VPU Test Mode To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907 (for more details, see chapter 4, “Troubleshooting”).
IMAGE PROCESSING 26 July 2002
6-26
6.6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING
Shading Correction Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the light emission level at the edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or the differences among the CCD pixels. Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction Picture element correction includes
1) the completion of the scan line correction process 2) the correction of the time when the CCD is not perpendicular to the light
• The green CCD line is taken as the standard. • Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match the standard.
NOTE: To adjust the vertical line correction level, use SP4-932. Scan Line Correction R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 scan lines apart (8 lines total) when 100% magnification is used. • Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory. • The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnification
ratio. • If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to the
closest integer, but further correction is needed (☛ “Picture Element Correction”).
• Shading correction• Picture element correction• Scanner line correction• Scanner gamma correction• Filters• ADS ASIC 1
• Image Separation• ACS
• Color conversion• Main scan magnification• Printer gamma correction• Error diffusion
• Gradation processing
ASIC 2
ASIC 3 ASIC 4
• Image rotation• Image sort
LD Unit
HDD
SBU
Controller
BICU
B051D552.WMF
26 July 2002 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-27
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)
The RGB video signals from the CCD are sent to the ASIC1 chip on the BICU board. This signal is proportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1). Scanner gamma correction inverts the video signals. The shading circuit converts the signal from 10-bit to 8-bit. • The ASIC1 chip converts the signal levels as
shown in Fig. 2. • This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY
color conversion (conversion is done later in the image process).
• The same table is used for R, G, and B signals.
Filtering Appropriate software filters are applied to the RGB video signals. • Varies depending on the results of auto
text/photo separation (or on the selected original mode).
• RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas • Edge emphasis applied to text areas.
Background Density Control • Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certain
threshold. • The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).
Users can select a different threshold for each mode. ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) • Full color mode
1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original. 2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.
• Black and white mode 1) Determines the peak white level. 2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line. 3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white
background. 4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for
A/D conversion. 5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.
255
01023LightDark
B051D972.WMF
255
0255LightDark
B051D973.WMF
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
IMAGE PROCESSING 26 July 2002
6-28
Image Separation The original image is classified into the text and photo (dot screen) areas.
Edge Separation • Used to locate text and line diagrams • Locates areas of strong contrast. • Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels. • Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels. • Only uses data from the green CCD.
Dot Screen Separation • If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.
Colored Text Separation • Identifies whether the text area’s pixels are black or color. • Based on:
1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels. 2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.
ACS (Auto Color Selection)
The auto color selection function determines if an original is black/white or color. Black copy mode or full color mode is automatically selected. Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels. RGB video signals are compared. If the maximum difference among RGB signals is within a certain range, the original is considered black and white.
0 102 128 255
255
(40% UCR rate) (50% UCR rate)
RGB common data
153 (50% UCR rate)
204 (50% UCR rate)
Color first
Black and white first
B051D555.WMF
RGB signal after scanner γ correction
B
Sign
al L
evel
R G
B051D556.WMF
26 July 2002 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-29
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Color Conversion Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.
Conversion Matrix The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix operation. • Simple color copying. • No special modes applied. • To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.
Color Conversion Table Original Color
Toner K R Y G C B M W
Y 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 M 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 C 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 K 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Main Scan Magnification While the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge the original in the sub-scan direction, the ASIC2 chip on the BICU board handles reduction and enlargement in the main scan direction. • Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot be
squeezed or expanded). • Imaginary points are calculated, corresponding to a physical enlargement or
reduction. • Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the
image data for the nearest two true points. • The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.
NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a service manual and will not be covered here.
IMAGE PROCESSING 26 July 2002
6-30
Printer Gamma Correction
Ideally, the gamma curves for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black should be identical, as shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical components can result in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2. • Printer characteristics are much more variable than the scanner. Printer gamma
needs re-calibration and adjustment from time to time. • The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction. • ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text). • After ACC, the gamma curve for each color can be adjusted with service
programs (SP4-909 to SP4-918). • 4 different modes:
1) ID max. 2) Shadow (High ID) 3) Middle (Middle ID) 4) Highlight (Low ID)
• If the previous gamma curve was better, it can be recalled. • Factory settings can be loaded using SP5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate, since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings may no longer be suitable.
• Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5-610-5.
K
B051D990.WMFB051D989.WMF
Fig. 2 Fig. 1
26 July 2002 IMAGE PROCESSING
6-31
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
ID Max. This mode adjusts the total image density as shown in figure 3. Shadow (High ID) The High ID mode adjusts the image density between Level 6 and Level 9 of the color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure 4). Middle (Middle ID) The Middle ID mode adjusts the image density between Level 3 and Level 7 of the color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure 5). Highlight (Low ID) The Low ID mode adjusts the image density between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure 6).
B051D991.WMF
B051D992.WMF
B051D993.WMF
B051D994.WMF
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
IMAGE PROCESSING 26 July 2002
6-32
Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern The test pattern has eight 17-step gradation scales for each color (CMYK), including background white, for Text and Photo modes.
ACC automatically calibrates the printer gamma curve. The user starts the ACC process.
1. The user prints an ACC Test Pattern.
2. The user places the test pattern on the exposure glass.
3. The copier makes 8 scans to read each color scale.
4. The copier corrects the printer gamma by comparing the ideal settings with the current image density.
5. The copier combines the corrected gamma curve with the Shadow, Middle, and Highlight values currently in memory.
6. The copier then calculates the ID max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based on data from the ACC scan.
7. The corrected printer gamma curves can be adjusted further using SP modes (SP4-909 to SP4-918).
Error Diffusion Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion matrix. ASICs on the BICU Board Test You can check the ASIC for the image processing on the BICU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2. (☛ “4. Troubleshooting” for details)
K
C
M
Y
K
C
M
Y
Dark Light
B051D995.WMF
26 July 2002 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
6-33
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1. Ground brush 2. ID sensor 3. OPC belt 4. Bias brush 5. Image transfer belt cleaning blade6. Image transfer belt cleaning unit 7. T/B toner collection auger 1 8. T/B toner collection auger 2 9. T/B waste toner sensor feeler 10. Waste toner bottle switch 11. Paper transfer roller 12. Paper transfer roller unit 13. T/B waste toner bottle full sensor 14. Registration roller 15. Image transfer belt
16. Image transfer belt cleaning unit 17. Image transfer belt mark sensor 18. OPC belt cleaning brush 19. O/B waste toner sensor feeler 20. O/B waste toner bottle full sensor 21. O/B waste toner bottle switch 22. O/B toner collection auger 1 23. OPC belt cleaning unit 24. Charge corona unit 25. Laser optics unit 26. M development unit 27. C development unit 28. OPC belt support 29. Y development unit 30. K development unit
B051D352.WMF
10
11
12
13
14 15
1617
1819
202122 23 24
25
26
27
28
29
1 2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9
30
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 26 July 2002
6-34
6.7.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT
Power Supply [A]: High voltage supply [B]: Charge corona unit [C]: Harness High voltage supply [A] " Harness [C] " Charge corona unit [B] (negative charge) (☛ ! Photocopying Processes – Charge – Corona Charge – Scorotron Method) Grid and Wire Cleaning [A]: Motor [B]: Screw [C]: Wire cleaner [D]: Corona wire [E]: Grid The motor [A] drives the bottom screw [B], which moves the wire cleaner [C] forward or backward. The cleaner cleans the grid [E] and corona wire [D]. The cleaning feature is activated after 600 development counts (default), at the end of the job. However, if 1000 counts is reached in the middle of a job, the printing process is interrupted and the wire is cleaned. The counter counts up as shown in the table.
Black & White Color A4 (LT) LEF (or smaller) 1 count 4 counts Others 2 counts 8 counts
NOTE: 1) The counter always increases as shown in the table. These values are not adjustable.
2) To set the counter, use SP2-801 (☛ 5.2.2).
B051D311.WMF
B051D310.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A][C]
[B]
[D][E]
26 July 2002 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
6-35
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Quenching [A]: Quenching lamp [B]: Charge corona unit [C]: OPC belt (☛ ! Photocopying Processes – Quenching) 6.7.3 OPC BELT DRIVE
[A]: OPC belt [B]: Main motor [C]: Fly wheels [D]: Bottom shaft Main motor [B] " Gear " Timing belt " Bottom shaft [D] " OPC belt [A] The flywheels [C] ensure that the OPC belt moves smoothly. NOTE: The OPC belt and transfer belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect
the OPC belt by turning it, you must also turn the transfer belt at the same time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts.
B051D309.WMF
B051D308.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 26 July 2002
6-36
6.7.4 OPC BELT CLEANING UNIT
[A]: Lubricant bar [B]: Cleaning brush [C]: Feeler link (on the frame) [D]: Waste toner bottle full sensor
(on the frame) [E]: Waste toner feeler [F]: Waste toner bottle switch
(on the frame) [G]: Toner collection auger 1 [H]: Toner collection auger 2 [I]: Waste toner bottle [J]: Cleaning blade [K]: OPC belt Bottle Detection The waste toner bottle switch [F] is on the frame, behind the OPC belt cleaning unit. When the unit is installed, it pushes the switch, which indicates the bottle is in place. Waste Toner Collection The cleaning brush [B] and the cleaning blade [J] removes the toner remaining on the OPC belt [K] surface. (☛ ! Photocopying Processes – Cleaning – Counter Blade + Brush) Toner collection auger 1 [G] moves this toner to the front side, where it is collected in the waste toner bottle [I]. Toner collection auger 2 [H] levels the toner in the bottle. The waste toner feeler [E] at the rear of the bottle is gradually lifted as the toner level in the bottle rises. When the feeler pushes the feeler link [C], the waste toner full sensor [D] is activated and the machine detects that the bottle is full. When the bottle becomes full, a message appears on the operation panel. The machine can make 100 more prints, then further printing is disabled. The bottle has a cap on the waste toner outlet. Empty the bottle when you visit the customer.
B051D313.WMF
[H]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F] [G] [I]
[J]
[E]
[K]
26 July 2002 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
6-37
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Drive [A]: Development motor [B]: OPC belt cleaning clutch [C]: Gear [D]: Gear [E]: Cleaning brush [F]: Toner collection auger 1 [G]: Opening for waste toner [H]: Toner collection auger 2 Development motor [A] " Gear " Timing belt " OPC belt cleaning clutch [B] " Gears [C, D] " OPC belt cleaning unit (including the brush and toner collection augers) The clutch cuts the drive to the cleaning unit when the development motor reverses (this is done at intervals to prevent toner blockages in the development unit). 6.7.5 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT
Drive [A]: Main motor [B]: Image transfer belt [C]: Bottom shaft (rubber
coated) Main motor [A] " Gears & timing belt " Bottom shaft [C] The bottom shaft can drive the transfer belt because of the friction between the belt [B] and the rubber coating on the shaft [C]. NOTE: The transfer belt and OPC belt contact each other. If you wish to inspect
the transfer belt by turning it, you must also turn the OPC belt at the same time to avoid damaging the surfaces of the belts.
B051D312.WMF
B051D314.WMF
[A] [B] [C] [D]
[E] [F]
[H]
[G]
[A]
[B]
[C]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 26 July 2002
6-38
Belt Mark Detection [A]: Belt mark sensor [B]: Mark The belt mark sensor is a reflective photosensor. To exactly synchronize the four mono-color toner images on the image transfer belt, the belt mark sensor [A] monitors the belt speed. The sensor detects the light reflected by the marks [B] at the rear end of the belt (25 marks per rotation; mark frequency: 21 mm). The sensor output is used to control the belt speed. Transfer Roller [A]: Transfer roller [B]: High voltage supply board [C]: Terminal plates The transfer roller [A] attracts toner from the OPC belt to the image transfer belt by using a positive charge. The terminal in the middle of the PCU contacts the terminal on the transfer roller shaft when the image transfer belt unit is installed in the PCU. The current is adjusted based on environmental temperature and humidity.
B051D315.WMF
B051D316.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[B]
26 July 2002 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
6-39
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.7.6 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT
[A]: Cleaning blade [B]: Toner collection auger 1 [C]: Image transfer belt [D]: Toner conduit [E]: Waste toner sensor feeler [F]: Waste toner bottle switch [G]: Actuator [H]: Waste toner full sensor [I]: Waste toner bottle [J]: Transfer roller [K]: Toner collection auger 2 [L]: Cleaning brush [M]: Lubricant bar [N]: Cleaning roller Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Cleaning roller [N] is positively charged, and transfers this charge to the cleaning brush [L]. The cleaning brush attracts residual toner from the image transfer belt [C]. This toner is attracted to the cleaning roller, where it is removed by the cleaning blade [A]. Waste Toner Collection The toner removed by the cleaning blade is transported by the toner collection auger 1 [B] to the rear, where it falls into the toner bottle [I] through the toner conduit [D]. Toner collection auger 2 [K] levels the toner in the bottle. There is a shutter on the top of the waste toner bottle. While out of the unit, the shutter is kept closed by a spring attached to it. When it is put back in the unit, a hook on top of the shutter is caught by the image transfer belt unit, and the shutter opens. Set Switch and Full Sensor When the bottle is full, a message appears on the operation panel. After this, 100 more prints can be output. Then the machine stops and printing is disabled.
B051D318.WMF
[M][N]
[B]
[C]
[K]
[E]
[F]
[G] [H] [I][J]
[D]
[L]
[A]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) 26 July 2002
6-40
Contact Mechanism
[A]: Image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid [B]: Half-turn clutch [C]: Lever [D]: Cam [E]: Fusing unit motor The fusing unit motor [E] drives the image transfer belt cleaning unit and the contact mechanism. When the toner images are being transferred from the OPC belt to the image transfer belt, the image transfer belt cleaning unit must be kept away from the belt. The unit contacts the belt only while cleaning the belt. NOTE: During standby mode, the cleaning unit is away from the image transfer
belt.
When the image transfer belt cleaning contact solenoid [A] is off, it catches a hook on the surface of the half-turn clutch [B]. As a result, the high point of the cam pushes the lever [C], and the cleaning unit is away from the transfer belt. When the solenoid activates, the hook is released, drive from the motor is transferred from the gear to the clutch, the cam [D] makes half a turn, the lever drops, and the cleaning unit contacts the transfer belt
B051d320.WMF
B051D322.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E] [A]
[B] REAR VIEW
26 July 2002 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
6-41
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Power Supply [A]: Cleaning brush [B]: Cleaning roller [C]: High voltage supply [D]: Contact spring [E]: Contact spring [F]: Contact spring The cleaning roller [B] charges the cleaning brush, and attracts toner from it. The high voltage supply [C] supplies positive charge to the cleaning roller via the harness and contact springs (leaf springs) [D, E, and F]. Drive
[A]: Gear 1 [B]: Image transfer belt cleaning
clutch [C]: Fusing unit motor [D]: Drive gear [E]: Gear 2 [F]: Toner path [G]: Image transfer belt [H]: Toner collection auger 1 [I]: Toner collection auger 2 [J]: Turning direction of the
cleaning brush Fusing unit motor [C] " drive gear [D] " gears [A] and [E] " cleaning brush [J] and toner collection augers [H and I] The clutch [B] controls the on/off timing of the mechanism.
B051D317.WMF
[A][B]
[C]
[D] [E]
[F]
[A] [B] [C]
[D]
[E]
[I] [G] [H]
[F]
[J]
LASER EXPOSURE 26 July 2002
6-42
6.8 LASER EXPOSURE 6.8.1 OVERVIEW
1. LD Unit 2. Synchronization Detector 3. Synchronization Detector Mirror 4. Dust Shield Glass 5. 3rd Mirror 6. Polygon Mirror Motor Unit
7. W-Toroidal lens (WTL) 8. Fθ Lens 9. 1st Mirror 10. 2nd Mirror 11. Cylindrical Lens
B051D202.WMF
1
2 3
5
7 8 6
9
11
10
4
26 July 2002 LASER EXPOSURE
6-43
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.8.2 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR UNIT
Speed The polygon mirror motor rotates at about 21,024 rpm. 6.8.3 SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR
The synchronization detector is on the rear side of the laser optics housing unit. The synchronization detector simultaneously checks 2 laser beams. 6.8.4 LD UNIT
Two laser diodes in the LD unit emit 2 main-scan laser-beams. Having two lasers speeds up image creation. It also allows the polygon motor to operate at a lower speed, which cuts down noise emission and makes the motor last longer. The LD unit does not need any adjustment when replaced.
LASER EXPOSURE 26 July 2002
6-44
6.8.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH
Front Door The LD safety switch is the interlock switch. This switch is on the upper end of the front cover. This switch is linked to the following covers:
Front cover Right cover
The switch prevents laser emission if any of the above covers is opened. Circuit The LD safety switch is on the 5V circuit leading to the LD unit. Between the switch and the unit, the line has 2 contacts on the front door and on the right door (series circuit). When either of the covers is opened, the power supply is interrupted, preventing laser emission.
PSU BICU
+5V LD5V
InterlockSwitch
LDControl
IC
LDDR
B051D499.WMF
26 July 2002 LASER EXPOSURE
6-45
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Operation Panel Display and Switch Mechanism The front cover switch [A], right cover switch [B], and interlock switch [C] detect the positions of the front and right covers. When either or both covers are open, the message, “Open Cover”, appears with an illustration indicating which covers are open. The tables show the switch patterns and detected cover positions.
Front cover switch Off Right cover switch On Interlock switch Off
→→→→ Front cover open
Front cover switch Off Right cover switch Off Interlock switch Off →→→→ Front and right covers open
Front cover switch On Right cover switch Off Interlock switch Off
→→→→ Right cover open
[A]: Front cover switch [B]: Right cover switch [C]: Interlock switch [D]: Actuator (front cover) [E]: Actuator (right cover)
B051D901.WMF
B051D902.WMF
[A] [B] [C]
[D]
[E]
DEVELOPMENT 26 July 2002
6-46
6.9 DEVELOPMENT 6.9.1 OVERVIEW
K: black, Y: yellow, C: cyan, M: magenta
1. Memory chip 2. Toner cartridge 3. Toner cartridge agitators 4. Development agitator 5. Development unit
6. Toner supply roller 7. Development roller 8. Doctor roller 9. OPC belt
☛ !: Development – Mono-component Development – Double Development Roller Process
The development units operate in the following order: K → M → C → Y
B051D351.WMF
1
2 4 5 6 7
8
9
3
26 July 2002 DEVELOPMENT
6-47
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.9.2 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Replacing Units Recovery: Each new development unit spare part contains a starter toner cartridge. When the machine detects the memory chip on the new starter cartridge, it will clear the development unit end condition. The memory chip on a normal toner cartridge cannot clear the development unit end condition. A starter toner cartridge has more paddles on the toner cartridge agitators than a normal toner cartridge does. This is to transport toner more quickly from the cartridge into the toner hopper. When a development unit has to be replaced, use a starter toner cartridge in the development unit even if toner remains in the used normal toner cartridge. After the toner in the starter toner cartridge is all used up, the normal toner cartridge can be loaded into the development unit. Memory Chip Each toner cartridge contains a memory chip, which contains information on whether the cartridge is “new” or “not new”.
DEVELOPMENT 26 July 2002
6-48
6.9.3 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM
[A]: Development motor [B]: Development clutch [C]: Lever [D]: Cam (built into the gear) [E]: Development roller gear [F]: Development unit agitator [G]: Doctor roller
[H]: Toner supply roller [I]: Development roller [J]: Toner cartridge agitators [K]: Mylar sheet [L]: Toner cartridge [M]: Toner cartridge agitator gear
Drive Development motor [A] → development clutch [B] → lever [C] → agitators [J].
Development motor [A] → development clutch [B] → development roller gear [E] → development roller [I]
B051D301.WMF
[C]
[E]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[K] [L]
[F]
[M]
[J]
[D] [A] [B]
26 July 2002 DEVELOPMENT
6-49
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Rollers and Agitators Each toner cartridge contains two toner cartridge agitators [J]. They are equipped with several mylar sheets [K], which agitate the toner and send it to the development unit agitator [D]. The development unit agitator agitates the toner and sends it to the toner supply roller [H].
Toner cartridge agitators: Evenly mixes the toner in the cartridge, and sends it to the development unit
Development agitator: Evenly mixes the toner in the development unit, and sends it to the toner supply roller
Toner supply roller [H]: Supplies the development roller with toner Development roller: Transfers the toner to the OPC Doctor roller [G]: Regulates the amount of the toner on the
development roller Shutter Each toner cartridge has a shutter on its right side. The shutter is pushed open when the cartridge is installed in the development unit, and closed when removed from the unit.
DEVELOPMENT 26 July 2002
6-50
6.9.4 TONER END DETECTION
Mechanism [A]: Optic fiber [B]: Light emission [C]: Gap An optic fiber [A] in each development unit detects toner end. Light is emitted from the rear end [B] of the unit. There is a gap [C] in the optic fiber. When the development unit is filled with toner, the toner breaks the light path through the gap. When the unit is running out of toner, the light path is not broken. Toner Near-End Detection The machine uses two methods simultaneously: pixel count, and toner end sensor. If either of these methods detects near-end, the machine indicates near-end.
Near-End by Pixel Count The machine counts how many pixels have been printed with each toner cartridge. When there are 500 prints remaining until the estimated toner end condition, toner near-end is indicated.
Near-End by Toner End Sensor • If the toner end sensor output drops to toner end level, counter 1 is set to 1. • If the above condition (counter 1 is 1) is detected twice accumulated 14 seconds
while the development clutch is activated, counter 2 is set to 1. • If the above condition (counter 2 is 1) is detected twice continuously, the
machine enters the toner supply mode after the job. The above detection is carried out while the development clutch is activated. Toner supply mode after the job: • The development unit with the almost-empty cartridge idles for 40 s. • Then, it idles again for another 20 s. • During this 20 s period, the toner end sensor is checked every 10 ms. If a low
toner condition is not detected during this 20 s period, the machine returns to standby mode after idling all development units for 90 s.
• However, if a low toner condition was detected during that 20 s period, the machine indicates toner near-end.
B051D303.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
26 July 2002 DEVELOPMENT
6-51
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Toner End Detection When any one of the following conditions occurs, toner end is indicated.
1. If near-end was detected by pixel count: The remaining pixel count reaches 0.
2. If near-end was detected by toner end sensor: Either 100 developments or 100 prints at 5% coverage are made since near-end was detected.
3. If near-end was detected by pixel count, and later it was detected by toner end sensor again before toner end: Either the remaining pixel count reaches 0, or 100 developments or 100 prints at 5% coverage are made since near-end by toner end sensor was detected.
Toner End Recovery When the machine detects a new toner cartridge, it drives the development unit for that cartridge for about 3 minutes. During this time, the development clutch is repeatedly activated for 10 s and deactivated for 1 s. The machine checks the toner end condition every 20 s. The end and near-end conditions are cleared if the sensor detects sufficient toner. However, if the sensor does not detect sufficient toner after 5 minutes of development unit drive, the toner end condition remains and a new cartridge must be added.
DEVELOPMENT 26 July 2002
6-52
6.9.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM
Mechanism Each development unit has an independent clutch. When a development clutch turns on, a gear under the development unit moves the development unit into contact with the OPC belt. When the clutch turns off, two springs (one at the front and one at the rear) detach the development unit from the OPC belt.
☛ ! Color Processes – Color Development – Fixed Position Development Systems – Similar to Example 2: Model G033 [A]: OPC belt [B]: Development clutch Reverse Rotation The gears reverse at intervals to prevent toner from clumping.
B051D305.WMF
[A] [B]
26 July 2002 DEVELOPMENT
6-53
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.9.6 POWER SOURCE
[A]: Development unit [B]: Rear-side terminal [C]: Development roller [D]: Bias terminal [E]: Harness terminal [F]: High voltage supply [G]: Doctor roller Development, Toner Supply, and Doctor Rollers When a development unit [A] comes into contact with the OPC belt, the bias terminal [D] comes into contact with the harness terminal [E]. Then, a negative charge is supplied to the unit. The negative charge on the doctor roller is the same size as the charge on the development roller and toner supply roller. Doctor Roller The doctor roller [G] restricts the amount of toner on the development roller [C]. The high voltage supply [F] applies a charge to the doctor roller through the rear-side terminal cable [B]. This charge is the same as the charge applied to the development roller. However, the development roller charge is applied through a different terminal [E]. ☛ ! Mono-component Development – Toner Metering Blade (similar principle)
[A]
[B] [C][D]
[E]
[G]
[F]
PAPER FEED 26 July 2002
6-54
6.10 PAPER FEED 6.10.1 OVERVIEW
1. Registration roller 2. Path from duplex unit 3. Vertical transport roller 4. By-pass tray 5. Friction pad with spring (Tray 1) 6. Friction pad with spring (Tray 2) 7. Path from optional paper tray
8. Base plate (Tray 1) 9. Base plate (Tray 2) 10. Paper end fence (Tray 2) 11. Tray 2 12. Tray 1 13. Paper end fence (Tray 1)
The table lists the main and optional paper stations.
Tray Number Main/Optional Standard tray 2 Main unit By-pass tray 1
Paper tray unit 2 LCT 1
Optional unit
B051D605.WMF 10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
78 9
26 July 2002 PAPER FEED
6-55
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Transport Speed Until the registration roller, the paper travels at 240 mm/s. This high initial speed ensures that the first output time is as short as possible. From the registration roller to the exit, the paper travels at the following speeds:
178 mm/s (plain paper) 89 mm/s (thick paper or OHP films)
Friction Pad ☛ ! Handling Paper – Paper Feed – Paper Feed Methods – Friction Pad
NOTE: Replace the roller and pad as a unit (not separately). 6.10.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
[A]: Fusing unit motor [B]: Registration clutch [C]: Feed motor [D]: Feed clutch [E]: Feed roller [F]: Vertical transport roller [G]: Idle roller [H]: Registration roller [I]: Paper Feed and Vertical Transport The feed motor [C] drives the feed roller [E] and the vertical transport roller [F]. The action of the feed roller is controlled by the feed clutch [D]. Registration The fusing unit motor [A] drives the registration roller [H], under the control of the registration clutch [B]. The idle roller [G] facing the registration roller does not have any drive gears. It turns with the paper [I].
B051D602.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
PAPER FEED 26 July 2002
6-56
6.10.3 PAPER LIFT
Lift Mechanism The spring under the bottom plate [A] presses the plate upward. When you press the bottom plate as far down as possible, the hook on lever [C] holds the plate. The lever releases the bottom plate when it is pressed by the protruding part on the right tray rail; this happens when the tray [B] is completely pushed into the machine. [A]: Bottom plate [B]: Tray [C]: Lever Paper End/Near-End Detection [A]: Paper near-end sensor [B]: Paper near-end sensor feeler [C]: Paper end sensor [D]: Paper end sensor feeler The bottom plate gradually rises as paper is fed. The bottom plate position is checked with the near-end sensor feeler [B]. The sensor [A] is actuated when about 50 sheets are left in the tray, and the paper near-end message appears on the operation panel. When paper runs out, the paper end sensor feeler [D] drops into the cutout in the bottom plate. This actuates the sensor [C], and the paper end message appears on the operation panel.
B051D603.WMF
B051D606.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[A][B]
[C]
[D]
26 July 2002 PAPER FEED
6-57
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.10.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
Mechanism [A]: Tray set switch [B]: Paper size switch [C]: Paper size switch [D]: Paper size switch [E]: Actuator [F]: Lever [G]: End fence The end fence [G] moves the lever [F], which moves a different set of notches on the actuator [E] into contact with the paper size switches [B]∼ [D]. When you put the tray in the main unit, the rear fence of the tray and the actuator activate the switches; from this the machine detects the presence of the tray, and the paper size. Switch Pattern When the tray is pushed into the machine, the leftmost switch [A] is always activated by the rear fence of the tray; this switch detects the presence of the tray. The combination of the other 3 switches [B]∼ [D] detects the paper size.
Auto Detection Switch* North America Europe/Asia [A] [B] [C] [D]
DLT SEF A3 SEF On Off On On LG SEF B4 SEF On On On On
A4 SEF On On Off Off LT SEF On Off Off Off
B5 SEF 10.5" x 7.25" SEF On Off Off On LT LEF A4 LEF On On On Off
B5 LEF On On Off On A5 LEF On Off On Off
(No tray) Off Off Off Off
* On: Pushed Off: Not pushed
NOTE: 1) For the input check table, ☛ 5.2.2. 2) Other paper sizes are not detected. Use the System Settings - Tray
Paper Settings - Tray Paper Size user tool to set paper sizes.
B051D604.WMF
[E] [F]
[G]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION 26 July 2002
6-58
6.11 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION 6.11.1 OVERVIEW
1. Image transfer belt 2. Discharge plate 3. Separation lever
4. Spring 5. Paper transfer roller 6. Registration roller
Jammed Paper Release When you open the right cover, the units release the paper. This mechanism helps quickly clear paper jams. Image Transfer and Paper Separation ☛! Photocopying Processes – Image Transfer and Paper Separation – Transfer Roller + Discharger – Example 2: Models A172/A199 The current is adjusted based on paper weight and environmental temperature and humidity. A user tool specifies the paper weights. If “Plain” is selected, then another user tool defines when the paper is “normal” or “> 90 g/m2, 24lb”.
• “Plain” means normal or > 90 g/m2, 24lb. • “Thick” means paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb).
B051D401.WMF
1
5
6
3
2
4
26 July 2002 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
6-59
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.11.2 CONTACT/SEPARATION MECHANISM
[A]: Fusing unit motor [B]: Half-turn clutch [C]: Paper transfer solenoid [D]: Contact/separation lever [E]: Cam
Timing When transferring toner to paper, the paper transfer roller unit contacts the image transfer belt. At other times during printing, the unit stays away from the image transfer belt. After printing, the unit contacts the belt and stays there. NOTE: During standby mode, the unit stays away from the image transfer belt. Mechanism Fusing unit motor [A] → Gear → Paper transfer solenoid [C] → Cam [E] → Contact/separation lever [D] → Paper transfer roller unit movement The fusing unit motor [A] drives the mechanism. (It also drives the paper transfer roller). The cam [E] is controlled by the half-turn clutch [B] and the paper transfer solenoid [C]. When the solenoid is off, it catches a hook on the surface of the half-turn clutch [B]. As a result, the high point of the cam pushes the contact/separation lever [D], and the paper transfer roller unit is away from the belt. When the solenoid is activated, the hook is released, so the half-turn clutch makes a half-turn—the unit moves to the right and contacts the image transfer belt.
B051D404.WMF
B051D403.WMF
REAR VIEW
[D]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[A]
FRONT VIEW
PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION 26 July 2002
6-60
6.11.3 POWER SUPPLY
Circuit High voltage supply [A] → Terminal [B] → Paper transfer roller shaft [C] [A]: High voltage supply [B]: Terminal [C]: Paper transfer roller shaft [D]: Temperature-humidity sensor
(inside the rear-right cover) [E]: Discharge plate (negative
charge) Paper Transfer Roller Bias Normally, a constant current is applied to the paper transfer roller shaft [C]. The current varies with paper type, size, and thickness as well as humidity. Discharge Plate The discharge plate [E] discharges the remaining charge on the paper going past the paper transfer roller. This helps the paper separate from the image transfer belt. Temperature/Humidity Control The temperature-humidity sensor [D] is inside the rear-right cover. The sensor output is used to control the current for the paper transfer roller. The temperature and humidity can be read with SP2-912.
B051D402.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
26 July 2002 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
6-61
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Roller Cleaning The paper transfer roller is cleaned at the following times:
• After the user clears a paper jam • After the user closes the front cover • Just after the main power has been switched on • While the doctor roller is reversing. This is done every 50 prints (SP3-910), to
remove toner blockages in the development unit; if the 50-print interval expires in the middle of a job, it is done at the end of the job.
After paper passes the paper transfer roller, the paper transfer solenoid releases the paper transfer roller from the image transfer belt.
Then, a certain time after the trailing edge of the paper passes the registration sensor, the following steps occur:
1) The paper transfer solenoid turns on again, and the paper transfer roller contacts the image transfer belt.
2) A negative charge is applied to remove toner stuck to the paper transfer roller.
3) Positive and negative charge is applied alternately to remove any toner that is still stuck to the paper transfer roller.
Toner removed from the paper transfer roller goes back to the image transfer belt, where it is removed by the image transfer belt cleaning unit.
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
6-62
6.12 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1. Hot roller 2. Metal cleaning roller 3. Pressure roller 4. Pressure roller fusing lamp 5. Pressure roller thermistor 6. Heating roller thermistor 7. Thermostat 8. Heating roller fusing lamp
9. Heating roller 10. Fusing belt 11. Oil overflow sensor 12. Oiling roller 13. Oil supply roller 14. Fusing sponge roller 15. Spring roller 16. Metal cleaning roller
The fusing unit divides into two subunits: the fusing subunit and the oil supply subunit.
B051D502.WMF
2
67
10
14
3
4
5
13
12
11
8 9
1
15 16
26 July 2002 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6-63
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.12.2 DRIVE
[A]: Hot roller [B]: Pressure roller gear [C]: Cover disengage-ment gear [D]: Fusing unit motor [E]: Drive gear [F]: Fusing belt [G]: Heating roller [H]: Oil supply roller [I]: Oiling roller The fusing unit motor [D] drives the fusing unit through gears [C] and [E]. The hot roller [A] turns the fusing belt [F] as a result of the friction between the two. When the right cover is open, gear [C] moves away, which allows jammed paper to be removed from the fusing unit and exit easily.
B051D506.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[E]
[F] [G]
[H]
[I]
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
6-64
6.12.3 FUSING UNIT COMPONENTS
[A]: Fusing belt [B]: Heating roller [C]: Lamp (770 W) [D]: Thermostat [E]: Thermistor [F]: Pressure roller [G]: Lamp (350 W) [H]: Thermistor [I]: Thermofuse [J]: Pawl Fusing Belt This machine uses a fusing belt [A]. The paper goes between the fusing belt and the pressure roller [F]. Heating Roller Lamp The center of the heating roller [B] contains a lamp (770 W) [C]. The thermostat [D] and thermistor [E] control the temperature of the roller surface. The machine cuts power to the lamp when it detects 220°C. The thermostat cutoff point is 200°C. Pressure Roller Lamp The center of the pressure roller [F] contains a lamp (350 W) [G]. The thermistor [H] and thermofuse [I] control the temperature of the roller surface. The temperature of the surface of the pressure roller reaches to 250 °C when the pressure roller temperature rises gradually or it reaches 300 °C when it rises rapidly. Normally, the machine cuts the lamp power when the thermistor detects 220 °C. Pressure Roller Pawls The pawls [J] above the pressure roller help prevent paper jams.
B051D503.WMF
[A]
[C][B] [G]
[F]
[H]
[I]
[J][D][E]
26 July 2002 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6-65
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
[A]: High voltage supply [B]: Terminal [C]: Fusing belt [D]: Hot roller [E]: Heating roller [F]: Pressure roller [G]: Oiling roller Fusing Bias The high voltage supply [A] provides the fusing bias. The fusing bias is a negative voltage that quenches static electricity created on the belt [C] and rollers [D]∼ [F] by the paper. This prevents the belt and rollers from attracting dust and dirt. Fusing Unit SCs If a thermistor/thermostat problem occurs, a fusing unit SC may be displayed on the operation panel. Fusing unit SCs disable the machine (☛ 4.1.1). To reset fusing unit SCs, use SP5-810 (☛ 5.1.2).
B051D566.WMF
[A]
[C]
[D] [E]
[F]
[G]
[B]
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
6-66
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY
Oil Supply ☛! Photocopying Processes – Fusing – Oil Supply [A]: Oil tank [B]: Air inlet [C]: Oil pump [D]: Oil pipe [E]: Fusing unit [F]: Oil reservoir [G]: Felt [H]: Oil supply unit [I]: Oil supply roller [J]: Oiling roller [K]: Fusing sponge roller [L]: Metal cleaning roller The technician adds oil to the oil tank [A] in the bottom-left corner inside the rear cover. The oil pump [C] pumps oil along the oil pipe [D] to the oil reservoir [F] in the oil supply unit. The air inlet [B] equalizes the pressure inside the oil tank [A]. The oil goes to the fusing belt as follows: • Oil tank [A] " Oil pipe [D] (oil pump [C]) " Oil reservoir [F] " Felt [G] " Oil
supply roller [I] " Oiling roller [J]
The fusing sponge roller [K] removes excess oil from the fusing belt. The metal cleaning roller [L] removes foreign substances from the belt.
B051D501.WMF
B051D504.WMF
[A]
[B] [C] [E]
[D] [F]
[F]
[G]
[H][I] [K][J] [L]
[D]
26 July 2002 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6-67
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Oil Supply [A]: Oil end sensor [B]: Oil overflow sensor The oil end sensor [A] controls the supply of oil from the oil tank in the bottom of the machine, via the oil pump, to the reservoir in the oil supply unit. The oil end sensor detects oil by emitting a beam through the protruding part of the tank bottom (the bottom is transparent). When oil is detected, the pump does not supply oil up from the lower tank. So, the reservoir is normally less than half full (maximum capacity: 70 grams). When oil has been used up so that the level in the reservoir falls below the sensor, the sensor detects oil end. Then, the oil pump turns on to pump oil up from the oil tank, until the oil end sensor detects oil. • If the oil end sensor fails, the oil overflow sensor [B] detects when the reservoir is
full [C], and the pump stops (SC571 will be generated, and the machine must be repaired). This failsafe measure prevents oil flooding inside the machine.
B051D505.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
6-68
Oil End Detection and Recovery If the oil tank at the bottom of the machine has no oil in it, the following occurs:
1) The oil pump operates for 50 milliseconds and waits for 150 milliseconds. If the oil end condition still exists, this step is repeated. If the sensor still does not detect oil, this step can be repeated up to 150 times (total maximum time taken: 30 seconds).
2) If oil is still not detected, the pump stops for 30 seconds. 3) The oil pump repeats steps 1 and 2 until oil is detected. The pump can
repeat these steps up to 9 times. So, the machine can pump for up to 9 minutes if oil is not detected ([30 seconds + 30 seconds] x 9).
4) If oil is still not detected, the oil end counter starts. This counts the pages fed through the fusing unit. Every 100 pages, the oil pump operates again for 50 seconds to try to get oil into the fusing unit.
5) When the counter goes up to 50, the operation panel indicates oil near end (the counter is not reset).
6) When the counter goes up to 500, the code “SC 570” appears on the display, and printing stops.
7) To clear the oil end condition, a technician adds some oil to the oil tank in the bottom of the machine and clears the SC code (this is a Level A code). Then, the oil pump resumes steps 1 through 3. NOTE: Do not switch the machine on with the fusing unit out of the machine
if an oil end condition exists. This will clear the oil end counter, and the machine incorrectly detects oil.
8) If the oil end condition is cleared, the procedure ends. If not, the code “SC 570” appears again.
26 July 2002 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6-69
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
6.12.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The table lists default settings and variable ranges for temperature control.
External temperature (*1) More than 15°C ~ less than 30°C 15°C or lower 30°C or higher
Roller Heating Press. Heat. Press. Heat. Press. Fusing idling start (*2) 145 10 145 10 145 10 Print ready (*3) 165 70 Ready (standby mode) 175 120
Panel off 1 175 120 Panel off 2 165 115 Low power mode 140 100 Energy saver
Auto off mode
Room temp.
Room temp.
Mono color 150 Lamp off Normal paper Full color 170 Lamp off
Mono color 160 Lamp off ‘>90 g/m2, 24 lb (*4) Full color 180 Lamp off
Mono color 170 Lamp off Thick Full color 175 Lamp off Mono color 170 Lamp off OHP Full color 180 Lamp off Mono color 155 Lamp off
Printing
Duplex (*5) Full color 165 Lamp off
Heat.: +5 Adjustable with
SP1-105-27 Press.: +0
Adjustable with SP1-105-28
Heat.: –5 Adjustable with
SP1-105-29 Press.: +0
Adjustable with SP1-105-30
Variable range (*6) 100 ~ 190 30 ~ 200 0 ~ +20 0 ~ –20
*1: External temperature is measured (temperature/humidity sensor) when the main switch is turned on and when a job start signal is received.
*2: The pressure and heating rollers start idling.
*3: Fusing idling stops when both roller temperatures reach the print ready condition. The printer can process jobs when the rollers reach this temperature during warm-up.
*4: A user tool specifies the paper type in each tray (plain, thick, or OHP). If ‘plain’ is selected, then another user tool defines whether the paper in the tray is ‘normal’ or ‘>90 g/m2, 24 lb’. (☛ 5.2.2). ‘>90 g/m2, 24 lb’ means ‘greater than or equal to 90 g/m2, 24 lb’. • ‘Thick’ means paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb).
*5: Both sides of the paper are processed with the same roller temperatures.
*6: Use SP1-105 to adjust the default fusing temperatures (☛ 5.2.2).
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
6-70
6.12.6 ENERGY SAVER MODES
Overview
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature. This machine has three types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Panel-off mode (1 & 2) 2) Low power mode 3) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes. • Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Key Operator Tools – Panel
Off Level • Panel off level (1 or 2): User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Panel
Off Timer • Energy saver timer: System Settings – Timer Setting – Energy Saver Timer • Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto Off
Timer • Auto off disabling (SP mode): Set SP5-305 to "disable." This disables the
auto off mode.
Stand-by Mode
Auto Off Mode
Key Operation
Energy Saver Key ON -or-Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 10 s)
Panel-Off Mode (1&2)
Low Power Mode
Energy Saver Timer(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Return Time Less Than 3s Panel-Off Level 1Return Time Less Than 10s Panel-Off Level 2
Key Operation
Return Time Less Than 30 s
Off Mode
Off Stand-by Mode
FAX: RX, etc.Printer Data in After Printing
Operation Sw. Off -or-Auto Off Timer(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Operation Sw. Off -or-Auto Off Timer(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Operation Sw. Off -or-Auto Off Timer(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Return Time Less Than 99 s
Operation Sw. OnPlaten Cover Open / CloseOriginal Set ADF
B051D903.WMF
26 July 2002 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6-71
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Panel Off Mode Entering the panel off mode The machine enters the panel off mode when one of the following is done. • The panel off timer runs out. • The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second. If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in the energy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode without going into the panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the panel off timer is larger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off mode effective, specify a value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer and auto off timer.
What happens in panel off mode Panel off mode has 2 levels. The operator can select level 1 or level 2 with a UP mode (default: level 2). When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept at the temperatures indicated in the table at the bottom of the page, and the operation panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED. The fusing lamp temperature for Panel Off Mode 1 is the same as for Stand-by Mode. If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program (e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each fusing lamp rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode: • The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed • Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed • An original is placed in the ADF • The ADF is lifted • A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table The return time from the panel off mode is about 3 seconds (level 1) or 10 seconds (level 2).
Mode Operation Switch
Energy Saver LED Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V
Panel off On On
Level 1 Heating roller: 175oC Pressure roller: 120oC
Level 2 Heating roller: 165oC Pressure roller: 115oC
On On
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
6-72
Low Power Mode Entering the low power mode The machine enters the low power mode when the energy saver timer runs out.
What happens in low power mode When the machine enters the low power mode, the fusing lamps are kept at the temperatures indicated in the table, and the operation panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED. If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program (e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each fusing lamp rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode: • The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed • Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed • An original is placed in the ADF • The ADF is lifted • A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table The return time from the low power mode is about 30 seconds.
Mode Operation Switch
Energy Saver LED Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V
Low power On On Heating roller: 140oC Pressure roller: 100oC On On
26 July 2002 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6-73
Det
aile
dD
escr
iptio
ns
Auto Off Mode There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machine’s condition when it enters the Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the following is done. • The auto off timer runs out. • The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off. If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode. • Error or SC condition • An optional G4 unit is installed • Image data is stored in the memory • During memory TX or polling RX • The handset is off hook • An original is in the ADF • The ADF is open
Off Stand-by mode The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes the print job.
Off Mode The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal, or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The return time is about 99 seconds.
Mode Operation Switch
Energy Saver LED Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note
Off Stand-by Off Off Off
(On when printing) On On
Off Off Off Off Off Off +5VE is supplied
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 26 July 2002
6-74
6.12.7 PAPER EXIT
[A]: Interface gear [B]: Pressure roller gear [C]: Drive gear (fusing unit) [D]: Cover disengagement gear [E]: Fusing unit motor [F]: Fusing exit sensor feeler [G]: Turning direction of the
fusing exit sensor feeler [H]: Fusing exit sensor [I]: Paper exit sensor [J]: Turning direction of the
paper exit sensor feeler [K]: Paper exit sensor feeler [L]: Paper Drive Fusing unit motor [E] " gear [D] " fusing unit drive gear [C] " pressure roller gear [B] " gear [A] " exit rollers. Paper Jam Detection The fusing exit sensor [H] and the paper exit sensor [I] detect paper jams. 6.12.8 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION
[A]: Feeler [B]: Paper overflow sensor [C]: Paper [D]: Tray When the paper overflow sensor [B] is deactivated, the machine detects that the paper stack height exceeded the limit and stops printing.
B051D601.WMF
B051D507.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E][F]
[H]
[K]
[I][G]
[J]
[L]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
26 July 2002 SPECIFICATIONS
Spec-1
Spec
.
SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MAIN UNIT) Configuration: Desktop Print Process: 2 laser beam & dry electrostatic transfer system Original Type: Sheet/Book/object Original Size: Max: A3/11"x17" Copy Paper Size: Max: A3/11" x 17" Min: A6 SEF (100 x 148 mm)/8.5" x 5.5" Custom size: Width: 100 ~ 297 mm (3.9" ~ 11.5")
Length: 148 ~ 432 mm (5.8" ~ 17") *Printable area is 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17").
Paper Weight (excluding by-pass tray):
64 to 105 g/m2, 17 lb. to 28 lb.
Printing Speed (A4/8.5" x 11" LEF): Model Plain
Paper Thick OHP
Color 8 cpm 4 cpm 2 cpm U-C1a
Black & White 24 cpm 6.5 cpm 3.2 cpm Color 10 cpm 4 cpm 2 cpm U-C1b
Black & White 32 cpm 6.5 cpm 3.2 cpm
Main 250 sheets x 2 tray Paper tray unit (Option) 500 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Capacity:
By-pass (Option) 100 sheets LCT (Option) 1,000 sheets x 2
*Maximum capacity is 2,600 sheets.
Copy Tray Capacity: A4/LT or smaller: Up to 500 sheets B4 or larger: Up to 250 sheets
First Copy Time Color: 18 seconds (A4/8.5" x 11" LEF): Black & White: 7.8 seconds
Warming-up Time: Approx. 99 seconds No. of Continuous Copies: 1 to 100 Memory: 128 MB, expandable with extra 128 MB or 256 MB Hard Disk: 40 GB Reproduction Ratios: 5 Enlargement & 7 Reduction A4/A3 version LT/DLT Version Enlargement 400, 200, 141, 122,
115% 400, 200 155, 129, 121%
Full Size 100% 100% Reduction 93, 82, 75, 71, 65,
50, 25% 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25%
SPECIFICATIONS 26 July 2002
Spec-2
Zoom: 25% to 400% in 1% steps (Platen mode) 25% to 200% in 1% steps (ADF mode)
Scanning System: 3-line 1-chip CCD sensor (600 dpi) Light Source: 1 xenon lamp Photoconductor: OPC belt Charging: Corona wire with grid plate Print System: Two laser beam, 600 dpi Development System: Mono component toner Transfer: Image transfer: Transfer belt with bias roller
Paper transfer: Roller Separation: Discharge pin Fusing: Heating rollers and fusing belt Cleaning: OPC belt: Blade
Image transfer belt: Cleaning brush Quenching: Lamp Toner Supply: Cartridge
Power Source: Voltage Frequency Amperage NA 120 V 60 Hz 12 A EU & Asia 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 8 A
Power Consumption: Mainframe only Full System Maximum: Less than 1.5 kW Less than 1.5 kW Copying: Approx. 700 W Approx. 900 W Warm-up: Less than 1.5 kW Less than 1.5 kW Stand-by: Less than 200 W Less than 200 W Energy Saver/
Auto Off: 10 W 10 W
NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge Unit +1000-sheet Finisher
Noise Emission: Mainframe only Full System Stand-by: Less than 45 dB (A) Less than 50 dB (A) Copying: Less than 67 dB (A) Less than 70 dB (A)
NOTE: Full system: ARDF + 1 bin tray + Paper Tray Unit + Duplex Unit + Bridge Unit +1000-sheet Finisher
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 670 x 781 mm (21.65" x 26.37" x 30.74") Weight: Less than 80 Kg (176 lb)
26 July 2002 SPECIFICATIONS
Spec-3
Spec
.
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION 2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
B051V500.WMF
12
14 1
3
4
5
8 7
11
10
9
13 2
6
SPECIFICATIONS 26 July 2002
Spec-4
Version Item Machine Code
Common with No.
U-C1a B051 14 U-C1b B052 14 ARDF (Optional) B386 R-C2 2 Platen Cover (Optional) B484 1 Paper Tray Unit (Optional) B456 8 LCT (Optional) B457 7 1-bin Tray (Optional) B480 3 Shift Tray (Optional) B510 13 Duplex Unit (Optional) B509 5 By-pass Tray (Optional) B490 6 Interchange Unit (Optional) B481 4 Bridge Unit (Optional) B482 12 1000-sheet Finisher (Optional) B408 R-C2 10 Adjustment Table (Optional) B488 9 500-sheet Finisher (Optional) B458 11 128 MB Memory (Optional) G331 U-P 256 MB Memory (Optional) G332 U-P
Copier
Key Counter Bracket (Optional) B508 Fax Option (Optional) B502 G3 Interface Unit (Optional) B506 ISDN (Optional) B504 JBIG (Optional) A892 R-C2
Fax
Handset (Optional) B433 R-C2 Printer Unit (Optional) B463 Printer/Scanner Unit (Optional) B529 PS3 (Optional) B522 IEEE1394 (Optional) G336 Wireless LAN (Optional) B515
Printer/ Scanner
Media Link Board (Optional) B519
26 July 2002 SPECIFICATIONS
Spec-5
Spec
.
2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
ARDF
Original Size: Standard sizes Single-sided mode: A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Double-sided mode: A3 to A4, DLT to LT Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only) Max. width 297 mm Min. width 105 mm Max. length 1,260 mm Min. length 128 mm
Original Weight: Single-sided mode: 52 to 128 g/m2, 14 to 34 lb Double-sided mode: 52 to 105 g/m2, 14 to 28 lb
Table Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2) Original Position: Center Separation: FRR with feed belt Original Transport: Roller transport Original Feed Order: From the top original Reproduction Range: 25 to 200 % (Sub scan direction only) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier) Power Consumption: 50 W Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 110 mm Weight: 10 kg Bridge Unit
Paper Size: Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non-standard sizes Width: 100 to 305 mm Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m2 to 135 g/m2, 16 lb to 42 lb Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer) Dimensions (W x D x H): 413 x 435 x 126 mm Weight 3.0 kg (6.6 lbs)
SPECIFICATIONS 26 July 2002
Spec-6
By-pass Tray Unit
Paper Size: Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non-standard sizes Width: 90 to 305 mm (3" to 12") Length: 148 to 457.2 mm (5.83" to 18")
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 163 g/m2, 16 lb to 43.6 lb Dimensions (W x D x H): 310 x 380 x 275 mm Weight: 3 kg (6.6 lbs) Duplex Unit
Paper Size: Standard sizes A5 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non-standard sizes Width: 140 to 297 mm Length: 182 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 20 lb to 28 lb Tray Capacity: 1 sheet Power Consumption: 40 W Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V Dimensions (W x D x H): 90 x 495 x 452 mm Weight: 6 kg Interchange Unit
Paper Size: Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non-standard sizes Width: 100 to 305 mm Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m2 to 135 g/m2, 16 lb to 36 lb Power Consumption: 10 W Dimensions (W x D x H): 117 x 447 x 92 mm Weight: 1.6 kg
26 July 2002 SPECIFICATIONS
Spec-7
Spec
.
LCT
Paper Size: A4 sideways/LT sideways
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2, 16 lb to 34 lb Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb) Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer) Power Consumption: 30 W (Max.)/25 W (Ave.) Weight: 25 kg (55 lbs) Size (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 270 mm Paper Tray Unit
Paper Feed System: FRR Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 50%, Near End, and Empty) Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays Paper Weight: 60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.) Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame) Power Consumption: Less than 30 W Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 270 mm Weight: 25 kg (33 lb.) Shift Tray Unit
Paper Size: Standard Size: A5 lengthwise to A3 HLT lengthwise to DLT Non-standard Size: Paper Width: 90 to 297 mm Paper Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m², 16 to 28 lbs. Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lbs.): B4 or larger
250 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lbs.): A4 or smaller Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier) Power Consumption: 17 W Weight: 1.1 kg Size (W x D x H): 530 mm x 410 mm x 120 mm
SPECIFICATIONS 26 July 2002
Spec-8
1-Bin Tray Unit
Paper Size: Standard Size: A5 Lengthwise to A3 HLT Lengthwise to DLT Non-standard Size: Paper Width: 90 to 297 mm Paper Length: 148 to 432 mm
Paper Weight: 60 ~ 105 g/m², 16 ~ 28 lbs. Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lbs.) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier) Power Consumption: 0.5 W Weight: 1.1 kg Size (W x D x H): 530 mm x 435 mm x 120 mm 500-Sheet Finisher
Paper Size: A3, B4, A4, B5 sideways (Metric) DLT, LG, LT (Inch)
Paper Weight 52 to 128 g/m2, 14 to 34 lb. Staple Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb) Stack Capacity (Maximum):
500 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.) 250 sheets (A3, B4, DLT and LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Stapling Positions: 1 Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (3,000 staples/cartridge) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer) Power Consumption: 40 W Weight: 8.3 kg (18.4 lbs.) Dimensions (W x D x H): 350 x 490 x 230 mm
26 July 2002 SPECIFICATIONS
Spec-9
Spec
.
1000-sheet Finisher Upper Tray Paper Size: A3 to A6
DLT to HLT Paper Weight: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb) Paper Capacity: 250 sheets (A4 sideways/LT sideways or smaller: 80
g/m2, 20lb) 50 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Lower Tray Paper Size: No staple mode:
A3 to B5 DLT to HLT Staple mode: A3, B4, A4, B5 DLT to LT
Paper Weight: No staple mode: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 ~ 42 lb) Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 ~ 24 lb)
Stapler Capacity: 30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG) 50 sheets (A4, B5 sideways, LT)
Paper Capacity: No staple mode: 1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb) 500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb) Staple mode: (80 g/m2, 20 lb, number of sets)
Set Size 10 to 50 Size
2 to 9 10 to 30 31 to 50
A4/LT sideways B5 sideways 100 100 to 20 100 to 20
A4/LT Lengthwise 100 50 to 10 50 to 10 A3, B4, DLT, LG 50 50 to 10 —
Staple positions: 1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear) 2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left)
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer) Power Consumption: 50 W Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs) Dimensions (W x D x H): 527 x 520 x 790 mm (20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1")